WO2019133634A1 - Small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases - Google Patents

Small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019133634A1
WO2019133634A1 PCT/US2018/067538 US2018067538W WO2019133634A1 WO 2019133634 A1 WO2019133634 A1 WO 2019133634A1 US 2018067538 W US2018067538 W US 2018067538W WO 2019133634 A1 WO2019133634 A1 WO 2019133634A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
further aspect
substituted
alkyl
alkoxy
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2018/067538
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Richard E. Lee
Charles O. ROCK
Suzanne JACKOWSKI
Chitra Subramanian
Rajendra P. TANGALLAPALLY
Anne V. EDWARDS
Robert Zamboni
T. Jagadeeswar REDDY
Original Assignee
St. Jude Children's Research Hospital
Coa Therapeutics, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by St. Jude Children's Research Hospital, Coa Therapeutics, Inc. filed Critical St. Jude Children's Research Hospital
Publication of WO2019133634A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019133634A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D237/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazine or hydrogenated 1,2-diazine rings
    • C07D237/02Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazine or hydrogenated 1,2-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D237/06Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazine or hydrogenated 1,2-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D237/10Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazine or hydrogenated 1,2-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D237/24Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • Pantothenate Kinase (PanK, EC 2.7.1.33) catalyzes the biochemical conversion of pantothenate (vitamin B5) to phosphopantothenate and thereby initiates the biosynthesis of coenzyme A (CoA).
  • Vitamin B5 pantothenate
  • CoA coenzyme A
  • the activities of the PanK enzymes regulate the CoA intracellular concentration (Leonardi et al. (2005) Prog. Lipid Res. 44: 125-153; Jackowski and Rock (1981) J. Bacteriol. 148: 926-932; Zano et al. (2015) Mol. Genet. Metab. 116:281- 288).
  • CoA is an essential cofactor that functions as a carboxylic acid substrate carrier in various synthetic and oxidative metabolic pathways, such as the tricarboxylic acid cycle, sterol biosynthesis, heme biosynthesis, fatty acid and complex lipid synthesis and metabolism, and epigenetic modification of chromatin.
  • PanKla PanK i p. PanK2, and PanK3, which are encoded by three genes (Zhou et al. (2001) Nat. Genet. 28: 345-349; Zhang et al. (2005) J. Biol. Chem. 280: 32594-32601; Rock et al. (2002) Gene 291: 35-43).
  • PanKs regulate cellular CoA through feedback inhibition of the enzyme activity by CoA or CoA thioesters and each isoform responds to inhibition with a different sensitivity (Leonardi et al. (2005) Prog. Lipid Res. 44: 125-153).
  • the PanK isoform expression profiles differ among individual cell types, tissues and organs and the relative abundance of one or more isoforms determines the respective CoA levels (Dansie et al. (2014) Biochem. Soc. Trans. 42: 1033- 1036).
  • PKAN PanK-associated neurodegeneration
  • the PANK2 gene is highly expressed in human neuronal tissues and many of the mutations associated with PKAN result in truncated or inactivated PanK2 protein expression, or severely reduced activity (Zhang et al. (2006) J. Biol. Chem. 281: 107-114).
  • the BANK 2 mutations are predicted to result in significantly lower CoA levels, thereby reducing neuronal metabolism and function in PKAN patients. Tools are lacking for investigation of the relationship(s) between CoA levels and neurodegeneration.
  • Activation of the PanKl or PanK3 proteins that are also expressed in neuronal tissues could compensate for the reduction in PanK2 activity because functional
  • the ob/ob leptin-deficient mouse is a model of obesity-associated type II diabetes that exhibits abnormally high hepatic CoA (Leonardi et al. (2014) Diabetologia 57: 1466-1475). Consistent with the connection between hepatic CoA levels and glucose homeostasis, deletion of Pankl in the ob/ob mouse reduces hepatic CoA and results in normalization of the diabetic hyperglycemia and associated hyperinsulinemia characteristic of this strain (Leonardi et al. (2014) Diabetologia 57: 1466-1475). A genome-wide association study (Sabatti et al. (2009) Nature Genet.
  • PanK activators and inhibitors capable of modulating CoA levels and to assess the feasibility of such compounds as therapeutics in these diseases.
  • We recently disclosed our initial high throughput screening effort towards this goal Sharma et. al. (2015) J. Med.
  • PanK antagonists capable of modulating CoA levels as disease therapeutics.
  • the following disclosure describes a group of such compounds, as well as methods for making and using them.
  • the invention in one aspect, relates to compositions and methods for use in the prevention and treatment of disorders associated with pantothenate kinase activity such as, for example, PKAN and diabetes.
  • A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH 2 C(0) , CF 2 C(0), C(0)CH 2 , CH 2 S0 2 , S0 2 , NHC(O), N(CH 3 )C(0), and CH(OH)C(0); wherein each of Q 1 and Q 2 , when present, is independently selected from N and CH; wherein Q 3 is N and Q 4 is CH or wherein Q 4 is N and Q 3 is CH; wherein Z is a structure selected from:
  • each of R la and R lb when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 thioalkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy;
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -NO2, -SO2NH2, and -SO2CH3;
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-
  • compositions comprising at least one disclosed compound.
  • Also disclosed are methods of modulating pantothenate kinase activity in at least one cell comprising the step of contacting at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the term“comprising” can include the aspects“consisting of’ and“consisting essentially of.”
  • Ranges can be expressed herein as from“about” one particular value, and/or to “about” another particular value. When such a range is expressed, another aspect includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by use of the antecedent“about,” it will be understood that the particular value forms another aspect. It will be further understood that the endpoints of each of the ranges are significant both in relation to the other endpoint, and independently of the other endpoint. It is also understood that there are a number of values disclosed herein, and that each value is also herein disclosed as“about” that particular value in addition to the value itself. For example, if the value“10” is disclosed, then“about 10” is also disclosed. It is also understood that each unit between two particular units are also disclosed. For example, if 10 and 15 are disclosed, then 11, 12, 13, and 14 are also disclosed.
  • the terms“about” and“at or about” mean that the amount or value in question can be the value designated some other value approximately or about the same. It is generally understood, as used herein, that it is the nominal value indicated ⁇ 10% variation unless otherwise indicated or inferred. The term is intended to convey that similar values promote equivalent results or effects recited in the claims. That is, it is understood that amounts, sizes, formulations, parameters, and other quantities and characteristics are not and need not be exact, but can be approximate and/or larger or smaller, as desired, reflecting tolerances, conversion factors, rounding off, measurement error and the like, and other factors known to those of skill in the art.
  • an amount, size, formulation, parameter or other quantity or characteristic is“about” or“approximate” whether or not expressly stated to be such. It is understood that where“about” is used before a quantitative value, the parameter also includes the specific quantitative value itself, unless specifically stated otherwise.
  • references in the specification and concluding claims to parts by weight of a particular element or component in a composition denotes the weight relationship between the element or component and any other elements or components in the composition or article for which a part by weight is expressed.
  • X and Y are present at a weight ratio of 2:5, and are present in such ratio regardless of whether additional components are contained in the compound.
  • a weight percent (wt. %) of a component is based on the total weight of the formulation or composition in which the component is included.
  • the terms“optional” or“optionally” means that the subsequently described event or circumstance can or cannot occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not.
  • the term“subject” can be a vertebrate, such as a mammal, a fish, a bird, a reptile, or an amphibian.
  • the subject of the herein disclosed methods can be a human, non-human primate, horse, pig, rabbit, dog, sheep, goat, cow, cat, guinea pig or rodent.
  • the term does not denote a particular age or sex. Thus, adult and newborn subjects, as well as fetuses, whether male or female, are intended to be covered.
  • the subject is a mammal.
  • a patient refers to a subject afflicted with a disease or disorder.
  • the term“patient” includes human and veterinary subjects.
  • treatment refers to the medical management of a patient with the intent to cure, ameliorate, stabilize, or prevent a disease, pathological condition, or disorder.
  • This term includes active treatment, that is, treatment directed specifically toward the improvement of a disease, pathological condition, or disorder, and also includes causal treatment, that is, treatment directed toward removal of the cause of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder.
  • this term includes palliative treatment, that is, treatment designed for the relief of symptoms rather than the curing of the disease, pathological condition, or disorder; preventative treatment, that is, treatment directed to minimizing or partially or completely inhibiting the development of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder; and supportive treatment, that is, treatment employed to supplement another specific therapy directed toward the improvement of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder.
  • the term covers any treatment of a subject, including a mammal (e.g., a human), and includes: (i) preventing the disease from occurring in a subject that can be predisposed to the disease but has not yet been diagnosed as having it; (ii) inhibiting the disease, i.e., arresting its development; or (iii) relieving the disease, i.e., causing regression of the disease.
  • the subject is a mammal such as a primate, and, in a further aspect, the subject is a human.
  • subject also includes domesticated animals (e.g., cats, dogs, etc.), livestock (e.g., cattle, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, etc.), and laboratory animals (e.g., mouse, rabbit, rat, guinea pig, fruit fly, etc.).
  • domesticated animals e.g., cats, dogs, etc.
  • livestock e.g., cattle, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, etc.
  • laboratory animals e.g., mouse, rabbit, rat, guinea pig, fruit fly, etc.
  • the term“prevent” or“preventing” refers to precluding, averting, obviating, forestalling, stopping, or hindering something from happening, especially by advance action. It is understood that where reduce, inhibit or prevent are used herein, unless specifically indicated otherwise, the use of the other two words is also expressly disclosed.
  • diagnosisd means having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have a condition that can be diagnosed or treated by the compounds, compositions, or methods disclosed herein.
  • administering refers to any method of providing a pharmaceutical preparation to a subject.
  • Such methods are well known to those skilled in the art and include, but are not limited to, oral administration, transdermal administration, administration by inhalation, nasal administration, topical administration, intravaginal administration, ophthalmic administration, intraaural administration, intracerebral administration, rectal administration, sublingual administration, buccal administration, and parenteral administration, including injectable such as intravenous administration, intra-arterial administration, intramuscular administration, and subcutaneous administration.
  • Administration can be continuous or intermittent.
  • a preparation can be administered therapeutically; that is, administered to treat an existing disease or condition.
  • a preparation can be administered prophylactically; that is, administered for prevention of a disease or condition.
  • the terms“effective amount” and“amount effective” refer to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired result or to have an effect on an undesired condition.
  • a“therapeutically effective amount” refers to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired therapeutic result or to have an effect on undesired symptoms, but is generally insufficient to cause adverse side effects.
  • the specific therapeutically effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration; the route of administration; the rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed and like factors well known in the medical arts. For example, it is well within the skill of the art to start doses of a compound at levels lower than those required to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and to gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved. If desired, the effective daily dose can be divided into multiple doses for purposes of administration.
  • compositions can contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose.
  • the dosage can be adjusted by the individual physician in the event of any contraindications. Dosage can vary, and can be administered in one or more dose administrations daily, for one or several days. Guidance can be found in the literature for appropriate dosages for given classes of pharmaceutical products.
  • a preparation can be administered in a“prophylactically effective amount”; that is, an amount effective for prevention of a disease or condition.
  • dosage form means a pharmacologically active material in a medium, carrier, vehicle, or device suitable for administration to a subject.
  • a dosage form can comprise a disclosed compound, a product of a disclosed method of making, or a salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, such as a preservative, buffer, saline, or phosphate buffered saline.
  • Dosage forms can be made using conventional pharmaceutical manufacturing and compounding techniques.
  • Dosage forms can comprise inorganic or organic buffers (e.g., sodium or potassium salts of phosphate, carbonate, acetate, or citrate) and pH adjustment agents (e.g., hydrochloric acid, sodium or potassium hydroxide, salts of citrate or acetate, amino acids and their salts) antioxidants (e.g., ascorbic acid, alpha-tocopherol), surfactants (e.g., polysorbate 20, polysorbate 80, polyoxyethylene9-l0 nonyl phenol, sodium desoxycholate), solution and/or cryo/lyo stabilizers (e.g., sucrose, lactose, mannitol, trehalose), osmotic adjustment agents (e.g., salts or sugars), antibacterial agents (e.g., benzoic acid, phenol, gentamicin), antifoaming agents (e.g., polydimethylsilozone), preservatives (e.g., thimerosal,
  • kit means a collection of at least two components constituting the kit. Together, the components constitute a functional unit for a given purpose. Individual member components may be physically packaged together or separately. For example, a kit comprising an instruction for using the kit may or may not physically include the instruction with other individual member components. Instead, the instruction can be supplied as a separate member component, either in a paper form or an electronic form which may be supplied on computer readable memory device or downloaded from an internet website, or as recorded presentation.
  • “instruction(s)” means documents describing relevant materials or methodologies pertaining to a kit. These materials may include any combination of the following: background information, list of components and their availability information (purchase information, etc.), brief or detailed protocols for using the kit, trouble-shooting, references, technical support, and any other related documents. Instructions can be supplied with the kit or as a separate member component, either as a paper form or an electronic form which may be supplied on computer readable memory device or downloaded from an internet website, or as recorded presentation. Instructions can comprise one or multiple documents, and are meant to include future updates.
  • therapeutic agent include any synthetic or naturally occurring biologically active compound or composition of matter which, when administered to an organism (human or nonhuman animal), induces a desired pharmacologic,
  • immunogenic, and/or physiologic effect by local and/or systemic action encompasses those compounds or chemicals traditionally regarded as drugs, vaccines, and biopharmaceuticals including molecules such as proteins, peptides, hormones, nucleic acids, gene constructs and the like.
  • therapeutic agents are described in well-known literature references such as the Merck Index (14 L edition), the Physicians' Desk Reference (64 th edition), and The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics (12 L edition) , and they include, without limitation, medicaments; vitamins; mineral supplements; substances used for the treatment, prevention, diagnosis, cure or mitigation of a disease or illness; substances that affect the structure or function of the body, or pro-drugs, which become biologically active or more active after they have been placed in a physiological environment.
  • the term“therapeutic agent” includes compounds or compositions for use in all of the major therapeutic areas including, but not limited to, adjuvants; anti-infectives such as antibiotics and antiviral agents; analgesics and analgesic combinations, anorexics, anti-inflammatory agents, anti-epileptics, local and general anesthetics, hypnotics, sedatives, antipsychotic agents, neuroleptic agents, antidepressants, anxiolytics, antagonists, neuron blocking agents, anticholinergic and cholinomimetic agents, antimuscarinic and muscarinic agents, antiadrenergics, antiarrhythmics, antihypertensive agents, hormones, and nutrients, antiarthritics, antiasthmatic agents, anticonvulsants, antihistamines, antinauseants, antineoplastics, antipruritics, antipyretics; antispasmodics, cardiovascular preparations (including calcium channel blockers, beta-blockers, an
  • the agent may be a biologically active agent used in medical, including veterinary, applications and in agriculture, such as with plants, as well as other areas.
  • therapeutic agent also includes without limitation, medicaments; vitamins; mineral supplements; substances used for the treatment, prevention, diagnosis, cure or mitigation of disease or illness; or substances which affect the structure or function of the body; or pro- drugs, which become biologically active or more active after they have been placed in a predetermined physiological environment.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable describes a material that is not biologically or otherwise undesirable, i.e. , without causing an unacceptable level of undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner.
  • the term“derivative” refers to a compound having a structure derived from the structure of a parent compound (e.g., a compound disclosed herein) and whose structure is sufficiently similar to those disclosed herein and based upon that similarity, would be expected by one skilled in the art to exhibit the same or similar activities and utilities as the claimed compounds, or to induce, as a precursor, the same or similar activities and utilities as the claimed compounds.
  • exemplary derivatives include salts, esters, amides, salts of esters or amides, and N-oxides of a parent compound.
  • the term“pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refers to sterile aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, as well as sterile powders for reconstitution into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use.
  • suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers, diluents, solvents or vehicles include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol and the like), carboxymethylcellulose and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil) and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
  • Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions and by the use of surfactants.
  • These compositions can also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents.
  • Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents such as paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid and the like. It can also be desirable to include isotonic agents such as sugars, sodium chloride and the like.
  • Prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form can be brought about by the inclusion of agents, such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin, which delay absorption.
  • Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the drug in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide, poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depending upon the ratio of drug to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissues.
  • the injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable media just prior to use.
  • Suitable inert carriers can include sugars such as lactose. Desirably, at least 95% by weight of the particles of the active ingredient have an effective particle size in the range of 0.01 to 10 micrometers.
  • a residue of a chemical species refers to the moiety that is the resulting product of the chemical species in a particular reaction scheme or subsequent formulation or chemical product, regardless of whether the moiety is actually obtained from the chemical species.
  • an ethylene glycol residue in a polyester refers to one or more -OCH2CH2O- units in the polyester, regardless of whether ethylene glycol was used to prepare the polyester.
  • a sebacic acid residue in a polyester refers to one or more -CO(CH2)8CO- moieties in the polyester, regardless of whether the residue is obtained by reacting sebacic acid or an ester thereof to obtain the polyester.
  • the term“substituted” is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds.
  • the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, and aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds.
  • Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described below.
  • the permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds.
  • the heteroatoms, such as nitrogen can have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms.
  • substitution or“substituted with” include the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound that does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc. It is also contemplated that, in certain aspects, unless expressly indicated to the contrary, individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e.. further substituted or unsubstituted).
  • aliphatic or“aliphatic group,” as used herein, denotes a hydrocarbon moiety that may be straight-chain (i.e., unbranched), branched, or cyclic (including fused, bridging, and spirofused polycyclic) and may be completely saturated or may contain one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-20 carbon atoms. Aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups, and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (cycloalkenyl)alkyl or (cycloalkyl)alkenyl.
  • alkyl as used herein is a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group of 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, isopropyl, «-butyl, isobutyl, s- butyl, /-butyl, «-pentyl, isopentyl, s-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, dodecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, eicosyl, tetracosyl, and the like.
  • the alkyl group can be cyclic or acyclic.
  • the alkyl group can be branched or unbranched.
  • the alkyl group can also be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the alkyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
  • A“lower alkyl” group is an alkyl group containing from one to six (e.g., from one to four) carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group can also be a Cl alkyl, C1-C2 alkyl, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C5 alkyl, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C7 alkyl, C1-C8 alkyl, C1-C9 alkyl, C1-C10 alkyl, and the like up to and including a C1-C24 alkyl.
  • alkyl is generally used to refer to both unsubstituted alkyl groups and substituted alkyl groups; however, substituted alkyl groups are also specifically referred to herein by identifying the specific substituent(s) on the alkyl group.
  • halogenated alkyl or“haloalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more halide, e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.
  • the term“monohaloalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with a single halide, e.g. fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.
  • the term “polyhaloalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is independently substituted with two or more halides, i.e. each halide substituent need not be the same halide as another halide substituent, nor do the multiple instances of a halide substituent need to be on the same carbon.
  • alkoxyalkyl specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more alkoxy groups, as described below.
  • aminoalkyl specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more amino groups.
  • hydroxyalkyl specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more hydroxy groups.
  • cycloalkyl refers to both unsubstituted and substituted cycloalkyl moieties
  • the substituted moieties can, in addition, be specifically identified herein; for example, a particular substituted cycloalkyl can be referred to as, e.g., an“alky ley cloalkyl.”
  • a substituted alkoxy can be specifically referred to as, e.g., a“halogenated alkoxy”
  • a particular substituted alkenyl can be, e.g., an“alkenylalcohol,” and the like.
  • cycloalkyl is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring composed of at least three carbon atoms.
  • examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, norbomyl, and the like.
  • heterocycloalkyl is a type of cycloalkyl group as defined above, and is included within the meaning of the term“cycloalkyl,” where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus.
  • the cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -NH 2 , (C1-C4) alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, ether, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, -N0 2 , silyl, sulfo-oxo, -SH, and C1-C4 thioalkyl, as described herein.
  • polyalkylene group as used herein is a group having two or more CTT groups linked to one another.
  • the polyalkylene group can be represented by the formula— (CH 2 ) a— , where“a” is an integer of from 2 to 500.
  • Alkoxy also includes polymers of alkoxy groups as just described; that is, an alkoxy can be a poly ether such as— OA 1 — OA 2 or— OA 1 — (OA 2 ) a— OA 3 , where“a” is an integer of from 1 to 200 and A 1 , A 2 , and A 3 are alkyl and/or cycloalkyl groups.
  • alkenyl as used herein is a hydrocarbon group of from 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
  • the alkenyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
  • groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described here
  • cycloalkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexenyl,
  • heterocycloalkenyl is a type of cycloalkenyl group as defined above, and is included within the meaning of the term “cycloalkenyl,” where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus.
  • the cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted with 0, 1,
  • 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C2-C4 alkenyl, C3-C6 cycloalkenyl, C2-C4 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldeyhyde, -NEE, (Cl- C4) alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, ketone, azide, -N0 2 , silyl, sulfo-oxo, -SH, and C1-C4 thioalkyl, as described herein.
  • alkynyl is a hydrocarbon group of 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • the alkynyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
  • cycloalkynyl as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring composed of at least seven carbon atoms and containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bound.
  • cycloalkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, cycloheptynyl, cyclooctynyl, cyclononynyl, and the like.
  • heterocycloalkynyl is a type of cycloalkenyl group as defined above, and is included within the meaning of the term “cycloalkynyl,” where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus.
  • the cycloalkynyl group and heterocycloalkynyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the cycloalkynyl group and heterocycloalkynyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.
  • aromatic group refers to a ring structure having cyclic clouds of delocalized p electrons above and below the plane of the molecule, where the p clouds contain (4n+2) p electrons.
  • aromaticity is found in Morrison and Boyd, Organic Chemistry, (5th Ed., 1987), Chapter 13, entitled“Aromaticity,” pages 477-497, incorporated herein by reference.
  • aromatic group is inclusive of both aryl and heteroaryl groups.
  • aryl as used herein is a group that contains any carbon-based aromatic group including, but not limited to, benzene, naphthalene, phenyl, biphenyl, anthracene, and the like.
  • the aryl group can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the aryl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde,— NEE, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.
  • biasryl is a specific type of aryl group and is included in the definition of“aryl.”
  • the aryl group can be a single ring structure or comprise multiple ring structures that are either fused ring structures or attached via one or more bridging groups such as a carbon- carbon bond.
  • biaryl can be two aryl groups that are bound together via a fused ring structure, as in naphthalene, or are attached via one or more carbon-carbon bonds, as in biphenyl.
  • aldehyde as used herein is represented by the formula— C(0)H.
  • NA 1 A 2 where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, hydrogen or alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • a specific example of amino is— NEE.
  • alkylamino as used herein is represented by the formula— NH(-alkyl) where alkyl is a described herein.
  • Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylamino group, ethylamino group, propylamino group, isopropylamino group, butylamino group, isobutylamino group, (sec-butyl)amino group, (tert-butyl)amino group, pentylamino group, isopentylamino group, (tert-pentyl)amino group, hexylamino group, and the like.
  • dialkylamino as used herein is represented by the formula— N(-alkyl)2 where alkyl is a described herein.
  • Representative examples include, but are not limited to, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, dibutylamino group, diisobutylamino group, di(sec-butyl)amino group, di(tert-butyl)amino group, dipentylamino group, diisopentylamino group, di(tert-pentyl)amino group, dihexylamino group, N-ethyl-N-methylamino group, N-methyl-N-propylamino group, N- ethyl-N-propylamino group and the like.
  • ester as used herein is represented by the formula— 0C(0)A 1 or— C(0)0A 1 , where A 1 can be alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • polystyrene resin as used herein is represented by the formula— (A 1 0(0)C-A 2 -C(0)0) a— or— (A 1 0(0)C-A 2 -0C(0)) a— , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and“a” is an integer from 1 to 500. “Polyester” is as the term used to describe a group that is produced by the reaction between a compound having at least two carboxylic acid groups with a compound having at least two hydroxyl groups.
  • ether as used herein is represented by the formula A'OA 2 .
  • a 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein.
  • polyether as used herein is represented by the formula— (A 1 0-A 2 0) a— , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and“a” is an integer of from 1 to 500.
  • Examples of polyether groups include polyethylene oxide, polypropylene oxide, and polybutylene oxide.
  • halo “halogen,” or“halide,” as used herein can be used interchangeably and refer to F, Cl, Br, or I.
  • the terms“pseudohalide,”“pseudohalogen,” or“pseudohalo,” as used herein can be used interchangeably and refer to functional groups that behave substantially similar to halides. Such functional groups include, by way of example, cyano, thiocyanato, azido, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, perfluoroalkyl, and perfluoroalkoxy groups.
  • the term“heteroalkyl,” as used herein refers to an alkyl group containing at least one heteroatom.
  • Suitable heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, O, N, Si, P and S, wherein the nitrogen, phosphorous and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen heteroatom is optionally quatemized.
  • Heteroalkyls can be substituted as defined above for alkyl groups.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic group that has at least one heteroatom incorporated within the ring of the aromatic group.
  • heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and phosphorus, where N-oxides, sulfur oxides, and dioxides are permissible heteroatom substitutions.
  • the heteroaryl group can be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • the heteroaryl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein.
  • Heteroaryl groups can be monocyclic, or alternatively fused ring systems. Heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, tetrazolyl, thienyl, pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, /V-methylpyrrolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, benzofuranyl, benzodioxolyl, benzothiophenyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, imidazopyridinyl, pyrazolopyridinyl, and pyrazolopyrimidinyl.
  • heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, pyridinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, thiophenyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, benzofri] oxazolyl, benzo
  • quinolinyl quinazolinyl, indazolyl, imidazo[l,2-b]pyridazinyl, imidazo[l,2-a]pyrazinyl, benzo[c][l,2,5]thiadiazolyl, benzo[c][ 1,2, 5] oxadiazolyl, and pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazinyl.
  • Heterocycle includes pyridine, pyrimidine, furan, thiophene, pyrrole, isoxazole, isothiazole, pyrazole, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole, including, 1,2,3- oxadiazole, l,2,5-oxadiazole and l,3,4-oxadiazole, thiadiazole, including, l,2,3-thiadiazole, l,2,5-thiadiazole, and l,3,4-thiadiazole, triazole, including, 1,2, 3-triazole, 1,3, 4-triazole, tetrazole
  • heterocyclyl group can also be a C2 heterocyclyl, C2-C3 heterocyclyl, C2- C4 heterocyclyl, C2-C5 heterocyclyl, C2-C6 heterocyclyl, C2-C7 heterocyclyl, C2-C8 heterocyclyl, C2-C9 heterocyclyl, C2-C10 heterocyclyl, C2-C11 heterocyclyl, and the like up to and including a C2-C18 heterocyclyl.
  • a C2 heterocyclyl comprises a group which has two carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom, including, but not limited to, aziridinyl, diazetidinyl, dihydrodiazetyl, oxiranyl, thiiranyl, and the like.
  • a C5 heterocyclyl comprises a group which has five carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom, including, but not limited to, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,
  • heterocyclyl group may be bound either through a heteroatom in the ring, where chemically possible, or one of carbons comprising the heterocyclyl ring.
  • bicyclic heterocycle or“bicyclic heterocyclyl,” as used herein refers to a ring system in which at least one of the ring members is other than carbon.
  • Bicyclic heterocyclyl encompasses ring systems wherein an aromatic ring is fused with another aromatic ring, or wherein an aromatic ring is fused with a non-aromatic ring.
  • Bicyclic heterocyclyl encompasses ring systems wherein a benzene ring is fused to a 5- or a 6- membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms or wherein a pyridine ring is fused to a 5- or a 6-membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms.
  • Bicyclic heterocyclic groups include, but are not limited to, indolyl, indazolyl, pyrazolo[l,5-a]pyridinyl, benzofuranyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, l,3-benzodioxolyl, 2,3-dihydro-l,4-benzodioxinyl, 3,4-dihydro-2H- chromenyl, lH-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-3-yl; lH-pyrrolo[3,2-b]pyridin-3-yl; and 1H- pyrazolo[3,2-b]pyridin-3-yl.
  • heterocycloalkyl refers to an aliphatic, partially unsaturated or fully saturated, 3- to l4-membered ring system, including single rings of 3 to 8 atoms and bi- and tricyclic ring systems.
  • the heterocycloalkyl ring-systems include one to four heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, wherein a nitrogen and sulfur heteroatom optionally can be oxidized and a nitrogen heteroatom optionally can be substituted.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, and tetrahydrofuryl.
  • the term“hydroxy” or“hydroxyl” as used herein is represented by the formula— OH.
  • a 1 C(0)A 2 The term“ketone” as used herein is represented by the formula A 1 C(0)A 2 , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • silica as used herein is represented by the formula— SiA 1 A 2 A 3 , where A 1 , A 2 , and A 3 can be, independently, hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • sulfo-oxo is represented by the formulas— S(0)A'.— SiO ⁇ A 1 ,— 0S(0) 2 A 1 , or— 0S(0) 2 0A 1 , where A 1 can be hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • a 1 can be hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • sulfonyl is used herein to refer to the sulfo-oxo group represented by the formula— S(0) 2 A 1 , where A 1 can be hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • a 1 can be hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • sulfone as used herein is represented by the formula A 1 S(0) 2 A 2 , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • a 1 S(0)A 2 The term“sulfoxide” as used herein is represented by the formula A 1 S(0)A 2 , where A 1 and A 2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
  • “R 1 ,”“R 2 ,”“R 3 ,”“R n ,” where n is an integer, as used herein can, independently, possess one or more of the groups listed above.
  • R 1 is a straight chain alkyl group
  • one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group can optionally be substituted with a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl group, a halide, and the like.
  • a first group can be incorporated within second group or, alternatively, the first group can be pendant (i.e.. attached) to the second group.
  • the amino group can be incorporated within the backbone of the alkyl group.
  • the amino group can be attached to the backbone of the alkyl group.
  • the nature of the group(s) that is (are) selected will determine if the first group is embedded or attached to the second group.
  • compounds of the invention may contain“optionally substituted” moieties.
  • the term“substituted,” whether preceded by the term“optionally” or not, means that one or more hydrogen of the designated moiety are replaced with a suitable substituent.
  • an“optionally substituted” group may have a suitable substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position.
  • Combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds.
  • individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e.. further substituted or unsubstituted).
  • stable refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, in certain aspects, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
  • Suitable monovalent substituents on R° are independently halogen, - (CH 2 )O 2 R ⁇ , -(haloR*), -(CH 2 )o 2 OH, -(CH 2 )o 2 OR*, -(CH 2 )o 2 CH(OR*) 2 ; -0(haloR*), -CN, -N 3 , -(CH 2 )O 2 C(0)R ⁇ , -(CH 2 )O 2 C(0)0H, -(CH 2 )O 2 C(0)0R ⁇ , -(CH 2 )O 2 SR ⁇ , -(CH 2 )O 2 SH, -(CH 2 )Q 2 NH 2 , -(CH 2 )O 2 NHR ⁇ , -(CH 2 )O 2 NR* 2 , -N0 2 , -SiR* 3 , -OSiR
  • Suitable divalent substituents that are bound to vicinal substitutable carbons of an“optionally substituted” group include: -0(CR * 2 ) 2 3 0-. wherein each independent occurrence of R * is selected from hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R * include halogen, - R ⁇ , -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -0(haloR*), -CN, -C(0)0H, -C(0)0R*, -NH 2 , -NHR*, -NR* 2 , or -N0 2 , wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently Ci-4 aliphatic, -CH 2 Ph, -0(CH 2 )o iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on a substitutable nitrogen of an“optionally substituted” group include -R ⁇ , -NR ⁇ 2 , -C(0)R ⁇ , -C(0)OR ⁇ , -C(0)C(0)R ⁇ , -C(0)CH 2 C(0)R ⁇ , - S(0) 2 R ⁇ .
  • each R ⁇ is independently hydrogen, Ci- 6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, unsubstituted -OPh, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R ⁇ , taken together with their intervening atom(s) form an unsubstituted 3-l2-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R ⁇ are independently halogen, - R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -0(haloR*), -CN, -C(0)OH, -C(0)OR*, -NH 2 , -NHR*, -NR* 2 , or -N0 2 , wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently Ci- 4 aliphatic, -CH 2 Ph, -0(CH 2 )o iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • the term“leaving group” refers to an atom (or a group of atoms) with electron withdrawing ability that can be displaced as a stable species, taking with it the bonding electrons.
  • suitable leaving groups include halides and sulfonate esters, including, but not limited to, triflate, mesylate, tosylate, and brosylate.
  • hydrolysable group and“hydrolysable moiety” refer to a functional group capable of undergoing hydrolysis, e.g., under basic or acidic conditions.
  • hydrolysable residues include, without limitation, acid halides, activated carboxylic acids, and various protecting groups known in the art (see, for example,“Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis,” T. W. Greene, P. G. M. Wuts, Wiley-Interscience, 1999).
  • organic residue defines a carbon containing residue, i.e. , a residue comprising at least one carbon atom, and includes but is not limited to the carbon-containing groups, residues, or radicals defined hereinabove.
  • Organic residues can contain various heteroatoms, or be bonded to another molecule through a heteroatom, including oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or the like. Examples of organic residues include but are not limited alkyl or substituted alkyls, alkoxy or substituted alkoxy, mono or di-substituted amino, amide groups, etc.
  • Organic residues can preferably comprise 1 to 18 carbon atoms, 1 to 15, carbon atoms, 1 to 12 carbon atoms, 1 to 8 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • an organic residue can comprise 2 to 18 carbon atoms, 2 to 15, carbon atoms, 2 to 12 carbon atoms, 2 to 8 carbon atoms, 2 to 4 carbon atoms, or 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • a very close synonym of the term“residue” is the term“radical,” which as used in the specification and concluding claims, refers to a fragment, group, or substructure of a molecule described herein, regardless of how the molecule is prepared.
  • a 2,4- thiazobdinedione radical in a particular compound has the structure: regardless of whether thiazobdinedione is used to prepare the compound.
  • the radical for example an alkyl
  • the number of atoms in a given radical is not critical to the present invention unless it is indicated to the contrary elsewhere herein.
  • Organic radicals contain one or more carbon atoms.
  • An organic radical can have, for example, 1-26 carbon atoms, 1-18 carbon atoms, 1- 12 carbon atoms, 1-8 carbon atoms, 1-6 carbon atoms, or 1-4 carbon atoms.
  • an organic radical can have 2-26 carbon atoms, 2-18 carbon atoms, 2-12 carbon atoms, 2-8 carbon atoms, 2-6 carbon atoms, or 2-4 carbon atoms.
  • Organic radicals often have hydrogen bound to at least some of the carbon atoms of the organic radical.
  • an organic radical that comprises no inorganic atoms is a 5, 6, 7, 8-tetrahydro-2-naphthyl radical.
  • an organic radical can contain 1-10 inorganic heteroatoms bound thereto or therein, including halogens, oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, and the like.
  • organic radicals include but are not limited to an alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, mono-substituted amino, di-substituted amino, acyloxy, cyano, carboxy, carboalkoxy, alkylcarboxamide, substituted alkylcarboxamide,
  • dialkylcarboxamide substituted dialkylcarboxamide, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfmyl, thioalkyl, thiohaloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, or substituted heterocyclic radicals, wherein the terms are defined elsewhere herein.
  • organic radicals that include heteroatoms include alkoxy radicals, trifluoromethoxy radicals, acetoxy radicals, dimethylamino radicals and the like.
  • Inorganic radicals contain no carbon atoms and therefore comprise only atoms other than carbon. Inorganic radicals comprise bonded combinations of atoms selected from hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, and halogens such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, which can be present individually or bonded together in their chemically stable combinations. Inorganic radicals have 10 or fewer, or preferably one to six or one to four inorganic atoms as listed above bonded together.
  • inorganic radicals include, but not limited to, amino, hydroxy, halogens, nitro, thiol, sulfate, phosphate, and like commonly known inorganic radicals.
  • the inorganic radicals do not have bonded therein the metallic elements of the periodic table (such as the alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, transition metals, lanthanide metals, or actinide metals), although such metal ions can sometimes serve as a pharmaceutically acceptable cation for anionic inorganic radicals such as a sulfate, phosphate, or like anionic inorganic radical.
  • Inorganic radicals do not comprise metalloids elements such as boron, aluminum, gallium, germanium, arsenic, tin, lead, or tellurium, or the noble gas elements, unless otherwise specifically indicated elsewhere herein.
  • a specific stereoisomer can also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture.
  • a 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture.
  • Many of the compounds described herein can have one or more chiral centers and therefore can exist in different enantiomeric forms. If desired, a chiral carbon can be designated with an asterisk (*). When bonds to the chiral carbon are depicted as straight lines in the disclosed formulas, it is understood that both the (R) and (S) configurations of the chiral carbon, and hence both enantiomers and mixtures thereof, are embraced within the formula.
  • one of the bonds to the chiral carbon can be depicted as a wedge (bonds to atoms above the plane) and the other can be depicted as a series or wedge of short parallel lines is (bonds to atoms below the plane).
  • the Cahn-Ingold-Prelog system can be used to assign the (R) or (S) configuration to a chiral carbon.
  • Compounds described herein comprise atoms in both their natural isotopic abundance and in non-natural abundance.
  • the disclosed compounds can be isotopically-labeled or isotopically-substituted compounds identical to those described, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number typically found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 O, 17 0, 35 S, 18 F and 36 Cl, respectively.
  • Compounds further comprise prodrugs thereof, and
  • isotopically-labeled compounds of the present invention for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3 H and 14 C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated, i.e. , 3 H, and carbon-l4, /. e.. 14 C, isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further, substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e. , 2 H, can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Isotopically labeled compounds of the present invention and prodrugs thereof can generally be prepared by carrying out the procedures below, by substituting a readily available isotopically labeled reagent for a non- isotopically labeled reagent.
  • the compounds described in the invention can be present as a solvate.
  • the solvent used to prepare the solvate is an aqueous solution, and the solvate is then often referred to as a hydrate.
  • the compounds can be present as a hydrate, which can be obtained, for example, by crystallization from a solvent or from aqueous solution.
  • one, two, three or any arbitrary number of solvent or water molecules can combine with the compounds according to the invention to form solvates and hydrates.
  • the invention includes all such possible solvates.
  • co-crystal means a physical association of two or more molecules which owe their stability through non-covalent interaction.
  • One or more components of this molecular complex provide a stable framework in the crystalline latice.
  • the guest molecules are incorporated in the crystalline lathee as anhydrates or solvates, see e.g.“Crystal Engineering of the Composition of Pharmaceutical Phases. Do Pharmaceutical Co-crystals Represent a New Path to Improved Medicines?” Almarasson, O., et. al, The Royal Society of Chemistry, 1889-1896, 2004.
  • Examples of co-crystals include p- toluenesulfonic acid and benzenesulfonic acid.
  • ketones with an a-hydrogen can exist in an equilibrium of the keto form and the enol form.
  • amides with an N-hydrogen can exist in an equilibrium of the amide form and the imidic acid form.
  • pyrazoles can exist in two tautomeric forms, N 1 - unsubstituted, 3-A 3 and A 1 -unsubstituted, 5-A 3 as shown below.
  • the invention includes all such possible tautomers.
  • polymorphic forms or modifications It is known that chemical substances form solids which are present in different states of order which are termed polymorphic forms or modifications.
  • the different modifications of a polymorphic substance can differ greatly in their physical properties.
  • the compounds according to the invention can be present in different polymorphic forms, with it being possible for particular modifications to be metastable. Unless stated to the contrary, the invention includes all such possible polymorphic forms.
  • a structure of a compound can be represented by a formula:
  • R is understood to represent five independent substituents, R" (a) , R" ,bl .
  • independent substituents it is meant that each R substituent can be independently defined. For example, if in one instance R" (a) is halogen, then R" ,bl is not necessarily halogen in that instance.
  • Certain materials, compounds, compositions, and components disclosed herein can be obtained commercially or readily synthesized using techniques generally known to those of skill in the art.
  • the starting materials and reagents used in preparing the disclosed compounds and compositions are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Co., (Milwaukee, Wis.), Acros Organics (Morris Plains, N.J.), Fisher Scientific (Pittsburgh, Pa.), or Sigma (St.
  • compositions of the invention Disclosed are the components to be used to prepare the compositions of the invention as well as the compositions themselves to be used within the methods disclosed herein. These and other materials are disclosed herein, and it is understood that when combinations, subsets, interactions, groups, etc. of these materials are disclosed that while specific reference of each various individual and collective combinations and permutation of these compounds cannot be explicitly disclosed, each is specifically contemplated and described herein. For example, if a particular compound is disclosed and discussed and a number of modifications that can be made to a number of molecules including the compounds are discussed, specifically contemplated is each and every combination and permutation of the compound and the modifications that are possible unless specifically indicated to the contrary.
  • compositions disclosed herein have certain functions. Disclosed herein are certain structural requirements for performing the disclosed functions, and it is understood that there are a variety of structures that can perform the same function that are related to the disclosed structures, and that these structures will typically achieve the same result.
  • a disorder associated with PanK activity such as, for example, PKAN and diabetes.
  • the disclosed compounds exhibit modulation of PanK activity.
  • the disclosed compounds exhibit inhibition of PanK activity.
  • the disclosed compounds exhibit activation of PanK activity.
  • the compounds of the invention are useful in the treatment or prevention of disorders associated with PanK dysfunction and other diseases in which PanKs or altered levels of CoA and CoA esters are involved, as further described herein.
  • each disclosed derivative can be optionally further substituted. It is also contemplated that any one or more derivative can be optionally omitted from the invention. It is understood that a disclosed compound can be provided by the disclosed methods. It is also understood that the disclosed compounds can be employed in the disclosed methods of using.
  • A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH 2 C(0) , CF 2 C(0), C(0)CH 2 , CH 2 S0 2 , S0 2 , NHC(O), N(CH 3 )C(0), and CH(0H)C(0); wherein each of Q 1 and Q 2 , when present, is independently selected from N and CH; wherein Q 3 is N and Q 4 is CH or wherein Q 3 is N and Q 4 is CH; wherein Z is a structure selected from:
  • each of R la and R lb when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 thioalkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy;
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -N0 2 , -SO2NH2, and -SO2CH3;
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy,
  • the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
  • the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
  • the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
  • the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
  • the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
  • the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
  • the compound is selected from:
  • the compound is:
  • A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH 2 C(OX CF 2 C(0), C(0)CH 2 , CH 2 S0 2 , S0 2 , NHC(O), N(CH 3 )C(0), and CH(0H)C(0).
  • A is selected from OC(O) and C(O). In a still further aspect, A is OC(O). In yet a further aspect, A is C(O).
  • A is selected from CH 2 C(0) , CF 2 C(0), and C(0)CH 2 . In a further aspect, A is selected from CH 2 C(0) and C(0)CH 2 . In yet a further aspect, A is CH 2 C(0). In an even further aspect, A is C(0)CH 2 . In a still further aspect, A is CF 2 C(0).
  • A is selected from CH 2 C(0) and CF 2 C(0).
  • A is selected from CH 2 S0 2 and S0 2 . In a still further aspect, A is CH 2 S0 2 . In yet a further aspect, A is S0 2 .
  • A is selected from NHC(O) and N(CH3)C(0). In a still further aspect, A is NHC(O). In yet a further aspect, A is N(CH 3 )C(0).
  • A is selected from CH 2 C(0) and CH(0H)C(0). In a still further aspect, A is CH 2 C(0). In yet a further aspect, A is CH(0H)C(0). b. Q 1 AND Q 2 GROUPS
  • each of Q 1 and Q 2 when present, is independently selected from N and CH. In a further aspect, each of Q 1 and Q 2 , when present, is N. In a still further aspect, each of Q 1 and Q 2 , when present, is CH. In yet a further aspect, one of Q 1 and Q 2 , when present, is N and one of Q 1 and Q 2 , when present, is CH.
  • Q 1 is N and Q 2 is CH. In a still further aspect, Q 1 is CH and Q 2 is N. c. Q 3 AND Q 4 GROUPS
  • Q 3 is N and Q 4 is CH or Q 4 is N and Q 3 is CH. In a further aspect, Q 3 is N and Q 4 is CH. In a still further aspect, Q 4 is N and Q 3 is CH. d. Z GROUPS
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is a structure selected from:
  • Z is:
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 thioalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, and C1-C4 alkyl.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4 thioalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, and C1-C4 alkyl.
  • one of R la and R lb is hydrogen and one of R la and R lb is -OH.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, and C1-C4 alkyl. In a further aspect, each of R la and R lb is hydrogen.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, /-propyl, «-butyl, /-butyl, /-butyl, and s- butyl.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, - F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, and /-propyl.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, and ethyl. In an even further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, and methyl. [00166] In a further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, /-propyl, -OCH 3 , -OCH 2 CH 3 , - 0(CH 2 ) 2 CH3, and -OCH(CH3) 2 .
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, ethyl, -OCH3, and -OCFhCFb. In yet a further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, and -OCH 3 .
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 thioalkyl.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -SCH3, -SCFBCFb, -SCFhCFhCFb, and -SCH(CH3) 2 .
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -SCH3, and - SCFBCFb.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and -SCFBCFb.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and -SCH3.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl. In a still further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, and /-propyl. In yet a further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, methyl, and ethyl. In an even further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and ethyl. In a still further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and methyl.
  • each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, and -Br. In a still further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, and -Cl. In yet a further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and -I. In an even further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and -Br. In a still further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and -Cl. In yet a further aspect, each of R la and R lb is independently selected from hydrogen and -F. f. R 2 GROUPS
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, S0 2 NH 2. SChCFb, S0 2 CF 3 , and N0 2 . In a further aspect, R 2 is hydrogen.
  • R 2 is selected from -CN, S0 2 NH 2. SChCFb, S0 2 CF 3 , and NO 2 .
  • R 2 is selected from -CN, SO 2 NH 2, SO 2 CH 3 , and SO 2 CF 3 .
  • R 2 is selected from -CN, SO 2 NH 2, and SO 2 CH 3 .
  • R 2 is selected from -CN and SO2NH2.
  • R 2 is NO2.
  • R 2 is SO2CF3.
  • R 2 is SO2CH3.
  • R 2 is SO 2 NH 2 .
  • R 2 is -CN.
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen and halogen. In a still further aspect, R 2 is selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, and -Br. In yet a further aspect, R 2 is selected from hydrogen, -F, and -Cl. In an even further aspect, R 2 is selected from hydrogen and -I. In a still further aspect, R 2 is selected from hydrogen and -Br. In yet a further aspect, R 2 is selected from hydrogen and -Cl. In an even further aspect, R 2 is selected from hydrogen and -F.
  • R 2 is selected from -CN and -Cl. g. R 3 GROUPS
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialky lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl), provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group.
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialky lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, Cl- C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialky lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1 group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, - SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, - NC , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , Cl- C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, Cl- C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy. In a still further aspect, R 3 , when present, is selected from C1-C4 hydroxy and C1-C4 alkoxy. In yet a further aspect, R 3 , when present, is selected from -CH2OH, - CH 2 CH 2 OH, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 OH, -CH 2 OCH 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 , - CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 , and -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 0CH 3 .
  • R 3 when present, is selected from -CH 2 OH, -CH 2 CH 2 OH, -CH 2 OCH 3 , and -CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 . In a still further aspect, R 3 , when present, is selected from -CH 2 OH and -CH 2 OCH 3 .
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, Cl- C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, - N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl. In a still further aspect, R 3 , when present, is selected from C1-C4 hydroxy and cyclopropyl. In yet a further aspect, R 3 , when present, is selected from -CH2OH, - CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH2CH2OH, -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 0H, and cyclopropyl. In an even further aspect, R 3 , when present, is selected from -CH2OH, -CH2CH2OH, and cyclopropyl. In a still further aspect, R 3 , when present, is selected from -CH2OH and cyclopropyl.
  • R 3 when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, Cl- C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4
  • R 3 when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, Cl- C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl. In a still further aspect, R 3 , when present, is C1-C4 hydroxy. In yet a further aspect, R 3 , when present, is - selected from CH 2 OH, -CH 2 CH 2 OH, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH, and -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 OH. In an even further aspect, R 3 , when present, is selected from -CH 2 OH and -CH 2 CH 2 OH. In an even further aspect, R 3 , when present, is propan- l-olyl.
  • R 3 when present, is C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is C1-C8 alkoxy monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialk lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, Cl- C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalky
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , - CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, Cl- C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, Cl- C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group.
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 groups independently selected from halogen and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group.
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1 group selected from halogen and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group.
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from -F and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl.
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from -F and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl. In yet a further aspect, R 3 , when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from -F and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl. In an even further aspect, R 3 , when present, is cyclopropyl monosubstituted with a group selected from -F and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl.
  • R 3 when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 halogen groups. In a still further aspect, R 3 , when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 groups selected from -Cl and -F. In yet a further aspect, R 3 , when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 -Cl groups. In an even further aspect, R 3 , when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 -F groups.
  • R 3 is a structure selected from:
  • Ar 1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and substituted with 0,
  • 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NFF.
  • Ar 1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, - NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8
  • Ar 1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and unsubstituted.
  • Ar 1 is aryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups
  • halogen independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is aryl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, Cl- C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is aryl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is aryl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted aryl.
  • Ar 1 is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, Cl- C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is phenyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialk lamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is phenyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted phenyl.
  • Ar 1 is heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is heteroaryl substituted with 0,
  • 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is heteroaryl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is heteroaryl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted heteroaryl.
  • Ar 1 is selected from furanyl, 3-isopropylisoxazole, 6- isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl, 5-bromopyridin-2-yl, 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl, and substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is selected from furanyl, 3- isopropylisoxazole, 6-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl, 5-bromopyri din-2 -yl, 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl, and substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, - SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is selected from furanyl, 3-isopropylisoxazole, 6-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5- tertbutylpyridin-2-yl, 5-bromopyridin-2-yl, 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl, 3-pyridinyl, 4- pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl, and monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , - CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is selected from furanyl, 3-isopropylisoxazole, 6-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl, 5-isopropylpyridin-2- yl, 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl, 5-bromopyridin-2-yl, 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl, and unsubstituted.
  • Ar 1 is furanyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is furanyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is furanyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, - N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, Cl- C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted furanyl.
  • Ar 1 is 3-isopropylisoxazole substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 3-isopropylisoxazole substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 3-isopropylisoxazole monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted 3-isopropylisoxazole.
  • Ar 1 is 6-isopropylpyridin-2-yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 6-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 6-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted 6-isopropylpyridin-2-yl.
  • Ar 1 is 5-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 5-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 5-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted 5-isopropylpyridin-2-yl.
  • Ar 1 is 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl.
  • Ar 1 is 5-bromopyridin-2-yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 5-bromopyridin-2-yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 5-bromopyridin-2-yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted 5-bromopyridin-2-yl.
  • Ar 1 is 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted 5-(prop-l-en- 2-yl)pyridin-2-yl.
  • Ar 1 is 3-pyridinyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 3-pyridinyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is 3-pyridinyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted 3-pyridinyl.
  • Ar 1 is pyridinyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is pyridinyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N0 2 , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH 2 , C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is pyridinyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted pyridinyl.
  • Ar 1 is pyrimidinyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is pyrimidinyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is pyrimidinyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino.
  • Ar 1 is unsubstituted pyrimidinyl.
  • a compound can be present as one or more of the following structures:
  • a compound can be present as the following structure:
  • a compound can be selected from:
  • a compound can be selected from:
  • a compound can be selected from:
  • a compound can be selected from:
  • a compound can be selected from:
  • the compounds of this invention can be prepared by employing reactions as shown in the following schemes, in addition to other standard manipulations that are known in the literature, exemplified in the experimental sections or clear to one skilled in the art.
  • Reactions used to generate the compounds of this invention are prepared by employing reactions as shown in the following Reaction Schemes, as described and exemplified below.
  • the disclosed compounds can be prepared by Routes I-V, as described and exemplified below.
  • the following examples are provided so that the invention might be more fully understood, are illustrative only, and should not be construed as limiting.
  • substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below. SCHEME lA.
  • compounds of type 1.6 can be prepared according to reaction Scheme IB above.
  • compounds of type 1.3 are either commercially available or can be prepared by an arylation reaction of an appropriate amine, e.g., 1.1 as shown above, and an appropriate aryl halide, e.g., 1.2 as shown above.
  • arylation reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate base, e.g., triethylamine (TEA), in an appropriate solvent, e.g., acetonitrile, at an appropriate temperature, e.g., 160 °C, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 30 minutes using microwave irradiation.
  • TAA triethylamine
  • solvent e.g., acetonitrile
  • the deprotection is carried out in the presence of an appropriate deprotecting agent, e.g., trifluoroacetic acid (TFA), in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 1 hour.
  • an appropriate deprotecting agent e.g., trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
  • THF trifluoroacetic acid
  • an appropriate solvent e.g., dichloromethane
  • substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below.
  • compounds of type 2.4, and similar compounds can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 2B above.
  • compounds of type 2.2a and 2.2b can be prepared by reaction between an appropriate piperazine, e.g., 1.3 as shown above, and an appropriate isocyanate, e.g., 2.1a and 2.1b as shown above.
  • Appropriate isocyanates are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art.
  • the urea or bond formation reaction is carried out in the presence or absence of an appropriate base, e.g., triethylamine, in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or diethyl ether, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 3 hours.
  • the above reaction provides an example of a generalized approach wherein compounds similar in structure to the specific reactants above (compounds similar to compounds of type 1.6 and 2.3), can be substituted in the reaction to provide substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases similar to Formula 2.4.
  • substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below.
  • compounds of type 3.4, and similar compounds can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 3B above.
  • compounds of type 3.2a and 3.2b can be prepared by a coupling reaction of an appropriate carboxylic acid, e.g., 3.1a and 3.1b as shown above, with an appropriate amine, e.g., 1.3 as shown above.
  • Appropriate carboxylic acids and appropriate amines are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art.
  • the coupling reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate coupling agent, e.g., l-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-lH-l,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3- oxide hexafluorophosphate (HATU), and an appropriate base, e.g., diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA), in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane.
  • an appropriate coupling agent e.g., l-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-lH-l,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3- oxide hexafluorophosphate (HATU)
  • an appropriate base e.g., diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA)
  • DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
  • the above reaction provides an example of a generalized approach wherein compounds similar in structure to the specific reactants above (compounds similar to compounds of type 1.6 and 3.3), can be substituted in the reaction to provide substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases similar to Formula 3.4.
  • substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below.
  • compounds of type 4.4 can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 4B above.
  • compounds of type 4.2a and 4.2b can be prepared by an alkylation reaction of an appropriate amine, e.g., 1.3 as shown above, with an appropriate alkyl halide, e.g., 4.1a and 4.1b as shown above.
  • Appropriate amines and appropriate alkyl halides are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art.
  • the alkylation reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate base, e.g., diisopropylethylamine, in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 3 hours.
  • an appropriate base e.g., diisopropylethylamine
  • an appropriate solvent e.g., dichloromethane
  • the above reaction provides an example of a generalized approach wherein compounds similar in structure to the specific reactants above (compounds similar to compounds of type 1.6 and 4.3), can be substituted in the reaction to provide substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases similar to Formula 4.4.
  • substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below.
  • compounds of type 5.6 can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 5B above.
  • compounds of type 5.2a and 5.2b can be prepared by a coupling reaction of appropriate sulfonyl chlorides, e.g., 5.1a and 5.1b as shown above, with an appropriate amine, e.g., 1.1 as shown above.
  • Appropriate sulfonyl chlorides and appropriate amines are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art.
  • the coupling reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate base, e.g., triethyl amine, in an appropriate solvent, e.g., acetonitrile.
  • the coupling reaction is followed by a deprotection.
  • the deprotection is carried out in the presence of an appropriate deprotecting agent, e.g., trifluoroacetic acid (TFA), in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 1 hour.
  • an appropriate deprotecting agent e.g., trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
  • TFA trifluoroacetic acid
  • Compounds of type 5.4a and 5.4b can be prepared by an arylation reaction of an appropriate sulfonyl agent, e.g., 5.2a and 5.2b, and an appropriate aryl halide, e.g., 5.3 as shown above.
  • Appropriate aryl halides are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art.
  • the arylation reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate base, e.g., triethylamine, in an appropriate solvent, e.g., acetonitrile, at an appropriate temperature, e.g., 160 °C, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 30 minutes.
  • an appropriate base e.g., triethylamine
  • an appropriate solvent e.g., acetonitrile
  • each disclosed method can further comprise additional steps, manipulations, and/or components. It is also contemplated that any one or more step, manipulation, and/or component can be optionally omitted from the invention. It is understood that a disclosed method can be used to provide the disclosed compounds. It is also understood that the products of the disclosed methods can be employed in the disclosed methods of using.
  • compositions comprising a disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the compounds and compositions of the invention can be administered in pharmaceutical compositions, which are formulated according to the intended method of administration.
  • the compounds and compositions described herein can be formulated in a conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers or excipients.
  • a pharmaceutical composition can be formulated for local or systemic administration, e.g., administration by drops or injection into the ear, insufflation (such as into the ear), intravenous, topical, or oral administration.
  • the nature of the pharmaceutical compositions for administration is dependent on the mode of administration and can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is sterile or sterilizable.
  • the therapeutic compositions featured in the invention can contain carriers or excipients, many of which are known to skilled artisans. Excipients that can be used include buffers (for example, citrate buffer, phosphate buffer, acetate buffer, and bicarbonate buffer), amino acids, urea, alcohols, ascorbic acid, phospholipids, polypeptides (for example, serum albumin), EDTA, sodium chloride, liposomes, mannitol, sorbitol, water, and glycerol.
  • nucleic acids, polypeptides, small molecules, and other modulatory compounds featured in the invention can be administered by any standard route of administration.
  • administration can be parenteral, intravenous, subcutaneous, or oral.
  • a modulatory compound can be formulated in various ways, according to the corresponding route of administration.
  • liquid solutions can be made for administration by drops into the ear, for injection, or for ingestion; gels or powders can be made for ingestion or topical application. Methods for making such formulations are well known and can be found in, for example, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Ed., Gennaro, ed., Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA 1990.
  • the disclosed pharmaceutical compositions comprise the disclosed compounds (including pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) thereof) as an active ingredient, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and, optionally, other therapeutic ingredients or adjuvants.
  • the instant compositions include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical, and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous)
  • compositions can be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can include a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compounds of the invention.
  • the compounds of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, can also be included in pharmaceutical compositions in combination with one or more other therapeutically active compounds.
  • the pharmaceutical carrier employed can be, for example, a solid, liquid, or gas.
  • solid carriers include lactose, terra alba, sucrose, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, and stearic acid.
  • liquid carriers are sugar syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, and water.
  • gaseous carriers include carbon dioxide and nitrogen.
  • any convenient pharmaceutical media can be employed.
  • water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, coloring agents and the like can be used to form oral liquid preparations such as suspensions, elixirs and solutions; while carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents, and the like can be used to form oral solid preparations such as powders, capsules and tablets.
  • carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents, and the like
  • oral solid preparations such as powders, capsules and tablets.
  • tablets and capsules are the preferred oral dosage units whereby solid pharmaceutical carriers are employed.
  • tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques
  • a tablet containing the composition of this invention can be prepared by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients or adjuvants.
  • Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing, in a suitable machine, the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent, surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine, a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • compositions of the present invention comprise a compound of the invention (or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof) as an active ingredient, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and optionally one or more additional therapeutic agents or adjuvants.
  • the instant compositions include compositions suitable for oral, rectal, topical, and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous) administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the particular host, and nature and severity of the conditions for which the active ingredient is being administered.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
  • compositions of the present invention suitable for parenteral administration can be prepared as solutions or suspensions of the active compounds in water.
  • a suitable surfactant can be included such as, for example, hydroxypropylcellulose.
  • Dispersions can also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof in oils. Further, a preservative can be included to prevent the detrimental growth of microorganisms.
  • compositions of the present invention suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions.
  • the compositions can be in the form of sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of such sterile injectable solutions or dispersions.
  • the final injectable form must be sterile and must be effectively fluid for easy syringability.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage; thus, preferably should be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol and liquid polyethylene glycol), vegetable oils, and suitable mixtures thereof.
  • compositions of the present invention can be in a form suitable for topical use such as, for example, an aerosol, cream, ointment, lotion, dusting powder, mouth washes, gargles, and the like. Further, the compositions can be in a form suitable for use in transdermal devices. These formulations can be prepared, utilizing a compound of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, via conventional processing methods. As an example, a cream or ointment is prepared by mixing hydrophilic material and water, together with about 5 wt% to about 10 wt% of the compound, to produce a cream or ointment having a desired consistency.
  • compositions of this invention can be in a form suitable for rectal administration wherein the carrier is a solid. It is preferable that the mixture forms unit dose suppositories. Suitable carriers include cocoa butter and other materials commonly used in the art. The suppositories can be conveniently formed by first admixing the composition with the softened or melted carrier(s) followed by chilling and shaping in molds. [00241] In addition to the aforementioned carrier ingredients, the pharmaceutical formulations described above can include, as appropriate, one or more additional carrier ingredients such as diluents, buffers, flavoring agents, binders, surface-active agents, thickeners, lubricants, preservatives (including anti-oxidants) and the like. Furthermore, other adjuvants can be included to render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient. Compositions containing a compound of the invention, and/or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, can also be prepared in powder or liquid concentrate form.
  • an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In a still further aspect, an effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is administered to a mammal.
  • the mammal is a human.
  • the human is a patient.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is used to treat a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity such as, for example, PKAN and diabetes.
  • compositions can be prepared from the disclosed compounds. It is also understood that the disclosed compositions can be employed in the disclosed methods of using.
  • the compounds and compositions disclosed herein are useful for treating, preventing, ameliorating, controlling or reducing the risk of a variety of disorders associated with pantothenate kinase activity, including, for example, PKAN, aging and diabetes.
  • methods of treating a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity in a subject comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one compound having a structure represented by a formula selected from:
  • A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH 2 C(0) , CF 2 C(0), C(0)CH 2 , CH 2 S0 2 , S0 2 , NHC(O), N(CH3)C(0), and CH(0H)C(0); wherein each of Q 1 and Q 2 , when present, is independently selected from N and CH; wherein Q 3 is N and Q 4 is CH or wherein Q 4 is N and Q 3 is CH; wherein Z is a structure selected from:
  • each of R la and R lb when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 thioalkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy;
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -N0 2 , -SO2NH2, and -SO2CH3;
  • R 3 when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy,
  • the disclosed compounds can be used in combination with one or more other drugs in the treatment, prevention, control, amelioration, or reduction of risk of disorders associated with PanK activity for which disclosed compounds or the other drugs can have utility, where the combination of the drugs together are safer or more effective than either drug alone.
  • Such other drug(s) can be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, contemporaneously or sequentially with a compound of the present invention.
  • a pharmaceutical composition in unit dosage form containing such other drugs and a disclosed compound is preferred.
  • the combination therapy can also include therapies in which a disclosed compound and one or more other drugs are administered on different overlapping schedules. It is also contemplated that when used in combination with one or more other active ingredients, the disclosed compounds and the other active ingredients can be used in lower doses than when each is used singly.
  • compositions include those that contain one or more other active ingredients, in addition to a compound of the present invention.
  • the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits a decrease in PanK activity.
  • the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 mM to about 25 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 15 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 10 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 5 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 1 pM.
  • the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.5 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.1 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.05 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.01 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.005 pM.
  • the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.005 pM to about 25 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.01 pM to about 25 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.05 pM to about 25 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.1 pM to about 25 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.5 pM to about 25 pM.
  • the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 1 pM to about 25 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 5 pM to about 25 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 10 pM to about 25 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 15 mM to about 25 mM.
  • the subject is a mammal.
  • the mammal is human.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the disorder prior to the administering step.
  • the subject is at risk for developing the disorder prior to the administering step.
  • the method further comprises identifying a subject at risk for developing the disorder prior to the administering step.
  • the disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity is selected from PKAN and diabetes.
  • disclosed are methods of modulating pantothenate kinase activity in at least one cell comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • modulating is inhibiting.
  • A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH 2 C(0) , CF 2 C(0), C(0)CH 2 , CH 2 S0 2 , S0 2 , NHC(O), N(CH3)C(0), and CH(0H)C(0); wherein each of Q 1 and Q 2 , when present, is independently selected from N and CH; wherein Q 3 is N and Q 4 is CH or wherein Q 4 is N and Q 3 is CH; wherein Z is a structure selected from: wherein each of R la and R lb , when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 thioalkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy; wherein R 2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -N0 2 , -SO2NH2, and -SO2CH3; wherein R 3 , when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and
  • the cell is mammalian. In a still further aspect, the cell is human. In yet a further aspect, the cell has been isolated from a mammal prior to the contacting step.
  • contacting is via administration to a mammal.
  • the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity prior to the administering step.
  • the disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity is selected from PKAN and diabetes.
  • the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for modulating pantothenate kinase activity prior to the administering step.
  • modulating is inhibiting.
  • the method of use is directed to the treatment of a disorder.
  • the disclosed compounds can be used as single agents or in combination with one or more other drugs in the treatment, prevention, control, amelioration, or reduction of risk of the aforementioned diseases, disorders and conditions for which the compound or the other drugs have utility, where the combination of drugs together are safer or more effective than either drug alone.
  • the other drug(s) can be administered by a route and in an amount commonly used therefore, contemporaneously or sequentially with a disclosed compound.
  • compositions in unit dosage form containing such drugs and the disclosed compound are preferred.
  • the combination therapy can also be administered on overlapping schedules. It is also envisioned that the combination of one or more active ingredients and a disclosed compound can be more efficacious than either as a single agent.
  • compositions and methods of the present invention can further comprise other therapeutically active compounds as noted herein which are usually applied in the treatment of the above mentioned pathological conditions.
  • the invention relates to a method for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disorder associated with PanK dysfunction in a mammal, the method comprising combining a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • the present method includes the administration to an animal, particularly a mammal, and more particularly a human, of a therapeutically effective amount of the compound effective in the inhibition of protein and especially PanK.
  • the dose administered to an animal, particularly a human, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to affect a therapeutic response in the animal over a reasonable time frame.
  • dosage will depend upon a variety of factors including the condition of the animal, the body weight of the animal, as well as the severity and stage of the disorder.
  • the invention relates to the manufacture of a medicament comprising combining a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • the invention relates to the uses of modulators of PanK.
  • the invention relates to the use of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disorder associated with PanK activity and associated Coenzyme A levels such as, for example, PKAN and diabetes.
  • the use relates to a process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, for use as a medicament.
  • the use relates to a process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method, wherein a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is intimately mixed with a therapeutically effective amount of the disclosed compound or the product of a disclosed method.
  • the use relates to the treatment of PKAN in a vertebrate animal. In a further aspect, the use relates to the treatment of PKAN in a human subject.
  • the use is the treatment of diabetes.
  • the diabetes is type II diabetes.
  • the disclosed uses can be employed in connection with the disclosed compounds, methods, compositions, and kits.
  • the invention relates to the use of a disclosed compound or composition of a medicament for the treatment of a disorder associated with PanK activity in a mammal.
  • the invention relates to the use of a disclosed compound or composition in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disorder associated with PanK activity selected from PKAN and diabetes.
  • kits comprising a disclosed compound and one or more of: (a) at least one agent known to treat PKAN; (b) at least one agent known to treat diabetes; (c) instructions for treating PKAN; and (d) instructions for treating diabetes, metabolic syndrome, and/or side effects of aging.
  • the agents and pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be provided in a kit.
  • the kit can also include combinations of the agents and pharmaceutical compositions described herein.
  • the informational material can be descriptive, instructional, marketing or other material that relates to the methods described herein and/or to the use of the agents for the methods described herein.
  • the informational material may relate to the use of the agents herein to treat a subject who has, or who is at risk for developing, a disorder associated with PanK activity.
  • the kits can also include paraphernalia for administering the agents of this invention to a cell (in culture or in vivo) and/or for administering a cell to a patient.
  • the informational material can include instructions for administering the pharmaceutical composition and/or cell(s) in a suitable manner to treat a human, e.g., in a suitable dose, dosage form, or mode of administration (e.g., a dose, dosage form, or mode of administration described herein).
  • the informational material can include instructions to administer the pharmaceutical composition to a suitable subject, e.g., a human having, or at risk for developing, a disorder associated with PanK activity.
  • the composition of the kit can include other ingredients, such as a solvent or buffer, a stabilizer, a preservative, a fragrance or other cosmetic ingredient.
  • the kit can include instructions for admixing the agent and the other ingredients, or for using one or more compounds together with the other ingredients.
  • the compound and the at least one agent known to treat PKAN are co-formulated. In a still further aspect, the compound and the at least one agent known to treat PKAN are co-packaged.
  • the compound and the at least one agent known to treat diabetes are co-formulated. In a still further aspect, the compound and the at least one agent known to treat diabetes are co-packaged.
  • the at least one agent known to treat PKAN is selected from baclofen, trihexyphenidyl, botulinum toxin, and an iron chelating agent.
  • the iron chelating agent is deferriprone.
  • the kit further comprises a plurality of dosage forms, the plurality comprising one or more doses; wherein each dose comprises an effective amount of the compound and the at least one agent known to treat PKAN.
  • the effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount.
  • the effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.
  • each dose of the compound and at least one agent known to treat PKAN are co-packaged.
  • each dose of the compound and the at least one agent known to treat PKAN are co formulated.
  • the at least one agent known to treat diabetes is selected from insulin, albiglutide, exenatide, liraglutide, pramlintide, dulaglutide, acarbose, alogliptin, bromocriptine mesylate, canagliflozin, chlorpropamide, colesevelam, dapagliflozin, empagliflozin, glimepiride, glipizide, glyburide, linagliptin, metformin, miglitol, nateglinide, pioglitazone, repaglinide, rosiglitazone, saxagliptin, and sitagliptin.
  • the kit further comprises a plurality of dosage forms, the plurality comprising one or more doses; wherein each dose comprises an effective amount of the compound and at least one agent known to treat diabetes.
  • the effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount.
  • the effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.
  • each dose of the compound and at least one agent known to treat diabetes are co-packaged.
  • each dose of the compound and at least one agent known to treat diabetes are co formulated.
  • the subject of the herein disclosed methods is a vertebrate, e.g., a mammal.
  • the subject of the herein disclosed methods can be a human, non human primate, horse, pig, rabbit, dog, sheep, goat, cow, cat, guinea pig or rodent.
  • the term does not denote a particular age or sex. Thus, adult and newborn subjects, as well as fetuses, whether male or female, are intended to be covered.
  • a patient refers to a subject afflicted with a disease or disorder.
  • the term“patient” includes human and veterinary subjects.
  • the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been diagnosed with a disorder associated with PanK activity prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed methods, the subject has been identified with a need for treatment prior to the administering step. In one aspect, a subject can be treated prophylactically with a compound or composition disclosed herein, as discussed herein elsewhere. a. DOSAGE
  • Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of the agents and pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures, using either cells in culture or experimental animals to determine the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population).
  • the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50.
  • Polypeptides or other compounds that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred.
  • therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose can be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (that is, the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half- maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture.
  • IC50 concentration of the test compound which achieves a half- maximal inhibition of symptoms
  • Exemplary dosage amounts of a differentiation agent are at least from about 0.01 to 3000 mg per day, e.g., at least about 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, or 3000 mg per kg per day, or more.
  • the formulations and routes of administration can be tailored to the disease or disorder being treated, and for the specific human being treated.
  • a subject can receive a dose of the agent once or twice or more daily for one week, one month, six months, one year, or more.
  • the treatment can continue indefinitely, such as throughout the lifetime of the human.
  • Treatment can be administered at regular or irregular intervals (once every other day or twice per week), and the dosage and timing of the administration can be adjusted throughout the course of the treatment.
  • the dosage can remain constant over the course of the treatment regimen, or it can be decreased or increased over the course of the treatment.
  • the dosage facilitates an intended purpose for both prophylaxis and treatment without undesirable side effects, such as toxicity, irritation or allergic response.
  • the dosage required to provide an effective amount of a formulation will vary depending on several factors, including the age, health, physical condition, weight, type and extent of the disease or disorder of the recipient, frequency of treatment, the nature of concurrent therapy, if required, and the nature and scope of the desired effect(s) (Nies et al., (1996) Chapter 3, In: Goodman & Gilman's The
  • compositions of the present invention can be any route of administering the disclosed compounds and compositions.
  • the compounds and compositions of the present invention can be any route of administering the disclosed compounds and compositions.
  • the compounds and compositions of the present invention can be any route of administering the disclosed compounds and compositions.
  • the compounds and compositions of the present invention can be any route of administering the disclosed compounds and compositions.
  • the compounds and compositions of the present invention can be any route of administering the disclosed compounds and compositions.
  • the route of administration can be determined by a patient's health care provider or clinician, for example following an evaluation of the patient.
  • an individual patient's therapy may be customized, e.g., the type of agent used, the routes of administration, and the frequency of administration can be personalized.
  • therapy may be performed using a standard course of treatment, e.g., using pre-selected agents and pre-selected routes of administration and frequency of administration.
  • Systemic routes of administration can include, but are not limited to, parenteral routes of administration, e.g., intravenous injection, intramuscular injection, and intraperitoneal injection; enteral routes of administration e.g., administration by the oral route, lozenges, compressed tablets, pills, tablets, capsules, drops (e.g., ear drops), syrups, suspensions and emulsions; rectal administration, e.g. , a rectal suppository or enema; a vaginal suppository; a urethral suppository; transdermal routes of administration; and inhalation (e.g., nasal sprays).
  • parenteral routes of administration e.g., intravenous injection, intramuscular injection, and intraperitoneal injection
  • enteral routes of administration e.g., administration by the oral route, lozenges, compressed tablets, pills, tablets, capsules, drops (e.g., ear drops), syrups, suspensions and emulsions
  • Table 2 illustrates the effects of the disclosed compounds on hPanK3, as well as various other properties of the disclosed compounds.
  • Table 3 illustrates the microsome stability and plasma protein binding of the disclosed compounds.

Abstract

The present disclosure relates to chemical compounds that modulate pantothenate kinase (PanK) activity for the treatment of metabolic disorders (such as diabetes mellitus type II), neurologic disorders (such as pantothenate kinase-associated neurodegeneration), pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds, and their use in treatment. This abstract is intended as a scanning tool for purposes of searching in the particular art and is not intended to be limiting of the present invention.

Description

SMALL MOLECULE MODULATORS OF PANTOTHENATE KINASES
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This Application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No.
62/610,831, filed on December 27, 2017, the contents of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
BACKGROUND
[0001] Pantothenate Kinase (PanK, EC 2.7.1.33) catalyzes the biochemical conversion of pantothenate (vitamin B5) to phosphopantothenate and thereby initiates the biosynthesis of coenzyme A (CoA). In most organisms the activities of the PanK enzymes regulate the CoA intracellular concentration (Leonardi et al. (2005) Prog. Lipid Res. 44: 125-153; Jackowski and Rock (1981) J. Bacteriol. 148: 926-932; Zano et al. (2015) Mol. Genet. Metab. 116:281- 288). CoA is an essential cofactor that functions as a carboxylic acid substrate carrier in various synthetic and oxidative metabolic pathways, such as the tricarboxylic acid cycle, sterol biosynthesis, heme biosynthesis, fatty acid and complex lipid synthesis and metabolism, and epigenetic modification of chromatin. Four closely related active PanK isoforms are identified in mammals: PanKla, PanK i p. PanK2, and PanK3, which are encoded by three genes (Zhou et al. (2001) Nat. Genet. 28: 345-349; Zhang et al. (2005) J. Biol. Chem. 280: 32594-32601; Rock et al. (2002) Gene 291: 35-43). The PanKs regulate cellular CoA through feedback inhibition of the enzyme activity by CoA or CoA thioesters and each isoform responds to inhibition with a different sensitivity (Leonardi et al. (2005) Prog. Lipid Res. 44: 125-153). The PanK isoform expression profiles differ among individual cell types, tissues and organs and the relative abundance of one or more isoforms determines the respective CoA levels (Dansie et al. (2014) Biochem. Soc. Trans. 42: 1033- 1036).
[0002] Mutations in the human PANK2 gene result in a rare and life-threatening neurological disorder known as PanK-associated neurodegeneration (PKAN) (Zhou et al. (2001) Nat. Genet. 28: 345-349; Johnson et al. (2004 ) Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 1012: 282-298; Kotzbauer et al. (2005) J. Neurosci. 25: 689-698). PKAN is an inherited autosomal recessive disorder that leads to progressive dystonia, dysarthria, parkinsonism, and pigmentary retinopathy. Classic PKAN develops in the first 10 years of life, starting around age 3; and patients are at risk for early death. The PANK2 gene is highly expressed in human neuronal tissues and many of the mutations associated with PKAN result in truncated or inactivated PanK2 protein expression, or severely reduced activity (Zhang et al. (2006) J. Biol. Chem. 281: 107-114). The BANK 2 mutations are predicted to result in significantly lower CoA levels, thereby reducing neuronal metabolism and function in PKAN patients. Tools are lacking for investigation of the relationship(s) between CoA levels and neurodegeneration. Activation of the PanKl or PanK3 proteins that are also expressed in neuronal tissues (Leonardi et al. (2007) FEBS Lett. 581:4639-4644) could compensate for the reduction in PanK2 activity because functional
Figure imgf000003_0001
redundancy among the isoforms is demonstrated in the Bank I and Bank 2 mouse models (Leonardi et al. (2010).
[0003] Limitation of the CoA supply by genetic deletion of Pankl in mice blunts the increase in hepatic CoA in response to fasting. This, in turn, decreases fatty acid oxidation and glucose production by the liver resulting in fasting hypoglycemia (Leonardi et al. (2010) PloS one 5: el 1107). Hypoglycemia and a significant reduction in fatty acid and ketone oxidation are the main causes for the early death of the Pankl Bank 2 mice in which both genes are deleted (Garcia et al. (2012) PLoS one 7: e4087l). The ob/ob leptin-deficient mouse is a model of obesity-associated type II diabetes that exhibits abnormally high hepatic CoA (Leonardi et al. (2014) Diabetologia 57: 1466-1475). Consistent with the connection between hepatic CoA levels and glucose homeostasis, deletion of Pankl in the ob/ob mouse reduces hepatic CoA and results in normalization of the diabetic hyperglycemia and associated hyperinsulinemia characteristic of this strain (Leonardi et al. (2014) Diabetologia 57: 1466-1475). A genome-wide association study (Sabatti et al. (2009) Nature Genet. 41: 35-46) indicates a significant correlation betw een BANK! gene variants and insulin levels in humans, supporting the concept that PanK inhibitors may be useful therapeutics for diabetes. Taken together, these data demonstrate the impact of altering the intracellular level of CoA on oxidative metabolism and glucose homeostasis.
[0004] The associations of PanK with diseases like PKAN and diabetes led us to identify and develop PanK activators and inhibitors capable of modulating CoA levels and to assess the feasibility of such compounds as therapeutics in these diseases. We recently disclosed our initial high throughput screening effort towards this goal (Sharma et. al. (2015) J. Med.
Chem. 58: 1563-1568). Our subsequent re-examination, careful filtration of hits and medicinal chemistry efforts identified new chemotypes capable of modulating PanK activity.
[0005] Despite the documented association of PanK with diseases like PKAN and diabetes, the feasibility of PanK antagonists capable of modulating CoA levels as disease therapeutics is uncertain. Thus, there remains a need for potent modulators of PanK to investigate the role of CoA in disease. The following disclosure describes a group of such compounds, as well as methods for making and using them.
SUMMARY
[0006] In accordance with the purpose(s) of the invention, as embodied and broadly described herein, the invention, in one aspect, relates to compositions and methods for use in the prevention and treatment of disorders associated with pantothenate kinase activity such as, for example, PKAN and diabetes.
[0007] Disclosed are compounds having a structure represented by a formula selected from:
Figure imgf000004_0001
wherein A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH2C(0), CF2C(0), C(0)CH2, CH2S02, S02, NHC(O), N(CH3)C(0), and CH(OH)C(0); wherein each of Q1 and Q2, when present, is independently selected from N and CH; wherein Q3 is N and Q4 is CH or wherein Q4 is N and Q3 is CH; wherein Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000004_0002
Figure imgf000005_0001
wherein each of Rla and Rlb, when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 thioalkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy; wherein R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -NO2, -SO2NH2, and -SO2CH3; wherein R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl), provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group; and wherein Ar1, when present, is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl), provided that when R3 is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl or C1-C8 alkoxy then R2 is not hydrogen, and provided that when each of Rla and Rlb is hydrogen then one of Q3 and Q4 is N, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. [0008] Also disclosed are methods of making a disclosed compound.
[0009] Also disclosed are pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one disclosed compound.
[0010] Also disclosed are methods of modulating pantothenate kinase activity in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0011] Also disclosed are methods of treating a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0012] While aspects of the present invention can be described and claimed in a particular statutory class, such as the system statutory class, this is for convenience only and one of skill in the art will understand that each aspect of the present invention can be described and claimed in any statutory class. Unless otherwise expressly stated, it is in no way intended that any method or aspect set forth herein be construed as requiring that its steps be performed in a specific order. Accordingly, where a method claim does not specifically state in the claims or descriptions that the steps are to be limited to a specific order, it is no way intended that an order be inferred, in any respect. This holds for any possible non-express basis for interpretation, including matters of logic with respect to arrangement of steps or operational flow, plain meaning derived from grammatical organization or punctuation, or the number or type of aspects described in the specification.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0013] The present invention can be understood more readily by reference to the following detailed description of the invention and the Examples included therein.
[0014] Before the present compounds, compositions, articles, systems, devices, and/or methods are disclosed and described, it is to be understood that they are not limited to specific synthetic methods unless otherwise specified, or to particular reagents unless otherwise specified, as such may, of course, vary. It is also to be understood that the terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular aspects only and is not intended to be limiting. Although any methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present invention, example methods and materials are now described.
[0015] While aspects of the present invention can be described and claimed in a particular statutory class, such as the system statutory class, this is for convenience only and one of skill in the art will understand that each aspect of the present invention can be described and claimed in any statutory class. Unless otherwise expressly stated, it is in no way intended that any method or aspect set forth herein be construed as requiring that its steps be performed in a specific order. Accordingly, where a method claim does not specifically state in the claims or descriptions that the steps are to be limited to a specific order, it is no way intended that an order be inferred, in any respect. This holds for any possible non-express basis for interpretation, including matters of logic with respect to arrangement of steps or operational flow, plain meaning derived from grammatical organization or punctuation, or the number or type of aspects described in the specification.
[0016] Throughout this application, various publications are referenced. The disclosures of these publications in their entireties are hereby incorporated by reference into this application in order to more fully describe the state of the art to which this pertains. The references disclosed are also individually and specifically incorporated by reference herein for the material contained in them that is discussed in the sentence in which the reference is relied upon. Nothing herein is to be construed as an admission that the present invention is not entitled to antedate such publication by virtue of prior invention. Further, the dates of publication provided herein may be different from the actual publication dates, which can require independent confirmation.
A. DEFINITIONS
[0017] As used in the specification and the appended claims, the singular forms“a,”“an” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to“a functional group,”“an alkyl,” or“a residue” includes mixtures of two or more such functional groups, alkyls, or residues, and the like.
[0018] As used in the specification and in the claims, the term“comprising” can include the aspects“consisting of’ and“consisting essentially of.”
[0019] Ranges can be expressed herein as from“about” one particular value, and/or to “about” another particular value. When such a range is expressed, another aspect includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by use of the antecedent“about,” it will be understood that the particular value forms another aspect. It will be further understood that the endpoints of each of the ranges are significant both in relation to the other endpoint, and independently of the other endpoint. It is also understood that there are a number of values disclosed herein, and that each value is also herein disclosed as“about” that particular value in addition to the value itself. For example, if the value“10” is disclosed, then“about 10” is also disclosed. It is also understood that each unit between two particular units are also disclosed. For example, if 10 and 15 are disclosed, then 11, 12, 13, and 14 are also disclosed.
[0020] As used herein, the terms“about” and“at or about” mean that the amount or value in question can be the value designated some other value approximately or about the same. It is generally understood, as used herein, that it is the nominal value indicated ±10% variation unless otherwise indicated or inferred. The term is intended to convey that similar values promote equivalent results or effects recited in the claims. That is, it is understood that amounts, sizes, formulations, parameters, and other quantities and characteristics are not and need not be exact, but can be approximate and/or larger or smaller, as desired, reflecting tolerances, conversion factors, rounding off, measurement error and the like, and other factors known to those of skill in the art. In general, an amount, size, formulation, parameter or other quantity or characteristic is“about” or“approximate” whether or not expressly stated to be such. It is understood that where“about” is used before a quantitative value, the parameter also includes the specific quantitative value itself, unless specifically stated otherwise.
[0021] References in the specification and concluding claims to parts by weight of a particular element or component in a composition denotes the weight relationship between the element or component and any other elements or components in the composition or article for which a part by weight is expressed. Thus, in a compound containing 2 parts by weight of component X and 5 parts by weight component Y, X and Y are present at a weight ratio of 2:5, and are present in such ratio regardless of whether additional components are contained in the compound.
[0022] A weight percent (wt. %) of a component, unless specifically stated to the contrary, is based on the total weight of the formulation or composition in which the component is included. [0023] As used herein, the terms“optional” or“optionally” means that the subsequently described event or circumstance can or cannot occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not.
[0024] As used herein, the term“subject” can be a vertebrate, such as a mammal, a fish, a bird, a reptile, or an amphibian. Thus, the subject of the herein disclosed methods can be a human, non-human primate, horse, pig, rabbit, dog, sheep, goat, cow, cat, guinea pig or rodent. The term does not denote a particular age or sex. Thus, adult and newborn subjects, as well as fetuses, whether male or female, are intended to be covered. In one aspect, the subject is a mammal. A patient refers to a subject afflicted with a disease or disorder. The term“patient” includes human and veterinary subjects.
[0025] As used herein, the term“treatment” refers to the medical management of a patient with the intent to cure, ameliorate, stabilize, or prevent a disease, pathological condition, or disorder. This term includes active treatment, that is, treatment directed specifically toward the improvement of a disease, pathological condition, or disorder, and also includes causal treatment, that is, treatment directed toward removal of the cause of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder. In addition, this term includes palliative treatment, that is, treatment designed for the relief of symptoms rather than the curing of the disease, pathological condition, or disorder; preventative treatment, that is, treatment directed to minimizing or partially or completely inhibiting the development of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder; and supportive treatment, that is, treatment employed to supplement another specific therapy directed toward the improvement of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder. In various aspects, the term covers any treatment of a subject, including a mammal (e.g., a human), and includes: (i) preventing the disease from occurring in a subject that can be predisposed to the disease but has not yet been diagnosed as having it; (ii) inhibiting the disease, i.e., arresting its development; or (iii) relieving the disease, i.e., causing regression of the disease. In one aspect, the subject is a mammal such as a primate, and, in a further aspect, the subject is a human. The term “subject” also includes domesticated animals (e.g., cats, dogs, etc.), livestock (e.g., cattle, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, etc.), and laboratory animals (e.g., mouse, rabbit, rat, guinea pig, fruit fly, etc.).
[0026] As used herein, the term“prevent” or“preventing” refers to precluding, averting, obviating, forestalling, stopping, or hindering something from happening, especially by advance action. It is understood that where reduce, inhibit or prevent are used herein, unless specifically indicated otherwise, the use of the other two words is also expressly disclosed.
[0027] As used herein, the term“diagnosed” means having been subjected to a physical examination by a person of skill, for example, a physician, and found to have a condition that can be diagnosed or treated by the compounds, compositions, or methods disclosed herein.
[0028] As used herein, the terms“administering” and“administration” refer to any method of providing a pharmaceutical preparation to a subject. Such methods are well known to those skilled in the art and include, but are not limited to, oral administration, transdermal administration, administration by inhalation, nasal administration, topical administration, intravaginal administration, ophthalmic administration, intraaural administration, intracerebral administration, rectal administration, sublingual administration, buccal administration, and parenteral administration, including injectable such as intravenous administration, intra-arterial administration, intramuscular administration, and subcutaneous administration. Administration can be continuous or intermittent. In various aspects, a preparation can be administered therapeutically; that is, administered to treat an existing disease or condition. In further various aspects, a preparation can be administered prophylactically; that is, administered for prevention of a disease or condition.
[0029] As used herein, the terms“effective amount” and“amount effective” refer to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired result or to have an effect on an undesired condition. For example, a“therapeutically effective amount” refers to an amount that is sufficient to achieve the desired therapeutic result or to have an effect on undesired symptoms, but is generally insufficient to cause adverse side effects. The specific therapeutically effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration; the route of administration; the rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed and like factors well known in the medical arts. For example, it is well within the skill of the art to start doses of a compound at levels lower than those required to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and to gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved. If desired, the effective daily dose can be divided into multiple doses for purposes of administration. Consequently, single dose compositions can contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose. The dosage can be adjusted by the individual physician in the event of any contraindications. Dosage can vary, and can be administered in one or more dose administrations daily, for one or several days. Guidance can be found in the literature for appropriate dosages for given classes of pharmaceutical products. In further various aspects, a preparation can be administered in a“prophylactically effective amount”; that is, an amount effective for prevention of a disease or condition.
[0030] As used herein,“dosage form” means a pharmacologically active material in a medium, carrier, vehicle, or device suitable for administration to a subject. A dosage form can comprise a disclosed compound, a product of a disclosed method of making, or a salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, such as a preservative, buffer, saline, or phosphate buffered saline. Dosage forms can be made using conventional pharmaceutical manufacturing and compounding techniques.
Dosage forms can comprise inorganic or organic buffers (e.g., sodium or potassium salts of phosphate, carbonate, acetate, or citrate) and pH adjustment agents (e.g., hydrochloric acid, sodium or potassium hydroxide, salts of citrate or acetate, amino acids and their salts) antioxidants (e.g., ascorbic acid, alpha-tocopherol), surfactants (e.g., polysorbate 20, polysorbate 80, polyoxyethylene9-l0 nonyl phenol, sodium desoxycholate), solution and/or cryo/lyo stabilizers (e.g., sucrose, lactose, mannitol, trehalose), osmotic adjustment agents (e.g., salts or sugars), antibacterial agents (e.g., benzoic acid, phenol, gentamicin), antifoaming agents (e.g., polydimethylsilozone), preservatives (e.g., thimerosal, 2- phenoxy ethanol, EDTA), polymeric stabilizers and viscosity-adjustment agents (e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, poloxamer 488, carboxymethylcellulose) and co-solvents (e.g., glycerol, polyethylene glycol, ethanol). A dosage form formulated for injectable use can have a disclosed compound, a product of a disclosed method of making, or a salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, suspended in sterile saline solution for injection together with a preservative.
[0031] As used herein,“kit” means a collection of at least two components constituting the kit. Together, the components constitute a functional unit for a given purpose. Individual member components may be physically packaged together or separately. For example, a kit comprising an instruction for using the kit may or may not physically include the instruction with other individual member components. Instead, the instruction can be supplied as a separate member component, either in a paper form or an electronic form which may be supplied on computer readable memory device or downloaded from an internet website, or as recorded presentation.
[0032] As used herein,“instruction(s)” means documents describing relevant materials or methodologies pertaining to a kit. These materials may include any combination of the following: background information, list of components and their availability information (purchase information, etc.), brief or detailed protocols for using the kit, trouble-shooting, references, technical support, and any other related documents. Instructions can be supplied with the kit or as a separate member component, either as a paper form or an electronic form which may be supplied on computer readable memory device or downloaded from an internet website, or as recorded presentation. Instructions can comprise one or multiple documents, and are meant to include future updates.
[0033] As used herein, the terms“therapeutic agent” include any synthetic or naturally occurring biologically active compound or composition of matter which, when administered to an organism (human or nonhuman animal), induces a desired pharmacologic,
immunogenic, and/or physiologic effect by local and/or systemic action. The term therefore encompasses those compounds or chemicals traditionally regarded as drugs, vaccines, and biopharmaceuticals including molecules such as proteins, peptides, hormones, nucleic acids, gene constructs and the like. Examples of therapeutic agents are described in well-known literature references such as the Merck Index (14L edition), the Physicians' Desk Reference (64th edition), and The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics (12L edition) , and they include, without limitation, medicaments; vitamins; mineral supplements; substances used for the treatment, prevention, diagnosis, cure or mitigation of a disease or illness; substances that affect the structure or function of the body, or pro-drugs, which become biologically active or more active after they have been placed in a physiological environment. For example, the term“therapeutic agent” includes compounds or compositions for use in all of the major therapeutic areas including, but not limited to, adjuvants; anti-infectives such as antibiotics and antiviral agents; analgesics and analgesic combinations, anorexics, anti-inflammatory agents, anti-epileptics, local and general anesthetics, hypnotics, sedatives, antipsychotic agents, neuroleptic agents, antidepressants, anxiolytics, antagonists, neuron blocking agents, anticholinergic and cholinomimetic agents, antimuscarinic and muscarinic agents, antiadrenergics, antiarrhythmics, antihypertensive agents, hormones, and nutrients, antiarthritics, antiasthmatic agents, anticonvulsants, antihistamines, antinauseants, antineoplastics, antipruritics, antipyretics; antispasmodics, cardiovascular preparations (including calcium channel blockers, beta-blockers, beta-agonists and antiarrythmics), antihypertensives, diuretics, vasodilators; central nervous system stimulants; cough and cold preparations; decongestants; diagnostics; hormones; bone growth stimulants and bone resorption inhibitors; immunosuppressives; muscle relaxants; psychostimulants; sedatives; tranquilizers; proteins, peptides, and fragments thereof (whether naturally occurring, chemically synthesized or recombinantly produced); and nucleic acid molecules (polymeric forms of two or more nucleotides, either ribonucleotides (RNA) or deoxyribonucleotides (DNA) including both double- and single-stranded molecules, gene constructs, expression vectors, antisense molecules and the like), small molecules (e.g., doxorubicin) and other biologically active macromolecules such as, for example, proteins and enzymes. The agent may be a biologically active agent used in medical, including veterinary, applications and in agriculture, such as with plants, as well as other areas. The term "therapeutic agent" also includes without limitation, medicaments; vitamins; mineral supplements; substances used for the treatment, prevention, diagnosis, cure or mitigation of disease or illness; or substances which affect the structure or function of the body; or pro- drugs, which become biologically active or more active after they have been placed in a predetermined physiological environment.
[0034] The term“pharmaceutically acceptable” describes a material that is not biologically or otherwise undesirable, i.e. , without causing an unacceptable level of undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner.
[0035] As used herein, the term“derivative” refers to a compound having a structure derived from the structure of a parent compound (e.g., a compound disclosed herein) and whose structure is sufficiently similar to those disclosed herein and based upon that similarity, would be expected by one skilled in the art to exhibit the same or similar activities and utilities as the claimed compounds, or to induce, as a precursor, the same or similar activities and utilities as the claimed compounds. Exemplary derivatives include salts, esters, amides, salts of esters or amides, and N-oxides of a parent compound.
[0036] As used herein, the term“pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” refers to sterile aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, as well as sterile powders for reconstitution into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use. Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers, diluents, solvents or vehicles include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol and the like), carboxymethylcellulose and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil) and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions and by the use of surfactants. These compositions can also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents such as paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid and the like. It can also be desirable to include isotonic agents such as sugars, sodium chloride and the like. Prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form can be brought about by the inclusion of agents, such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin, which delay absorption. Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the drug in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide, poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depending upon the ratio of drug to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissues. The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable media just prior to use. Suitable inert carriers can include sugars such as lactose. Desirably, at least 95% by weight of the particles of the active ingredient have an effective particle size in the range of 0.01 to 10 micrometers.
[0037] A residue of a chemical species, as used in the specification and concluding claims, refers to the moiety that is the resulting product of the chemical species in a particular reaction scheme or subsequent formulation or chemical product, regardless of whether the moiety is actually obtained from the chemical species. Thus, an ethylene glycol residue in a polyester refers to one or more -OCH2CH2O- units in the polyester, regardless of whether ethylene glycol was used to prepare the polyester. Similarly, a sebacic acid residue in a polyester refers to one or more -CO(CH2)8CO- moieties in the polyester, regardless of whether the residue is obtained by reacting sebacic acid or an ester thereof to obtain the polyester. [0038] As used herein, the term“substituted” is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, and aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds. Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described below. The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For purposes of this disclosure, the heteroatoms, such as nitrogen, can have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms. This disclosure is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds. Also, the terms“substitution” or“substituted with” include the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound that does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc. It is also contemplated that, in certain aspects, unless expressly indicated to the contrary, individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e.. further substituted or unsubstituted).
[0039] In defining various terms,“A1,”“A2,”“A3,” and“A4” are used herein as generic symbols to represent various specific substituents. These symbols can be any substituent, not limited to those disclosed herein, and when they are defined to be certain substituents in one instance, they can, in another instance, be defined as some other substituents.
[0040] The term“aliphatic” or“aliphatic group,” as used herein, denotes a hydrocarbon moiety that may be straight-chain (i.e., unbranched), branched, or cyclic (including fused, bridging, and spirofused polycyclic) and may be completely saturated or may contain one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-20 carbon atoms. Aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups, and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (cycloalkenyl)alkyl or (cycloalkyl)alkenyl.
[0041] The term“alkyl” as used herein is a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon group of 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, isopropyl, «-butyl, isobutyl, s- butyl, /-butyl, «-pentyl, isopentyl, s-pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, dodecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, eicosyl, tetracosyl, and the like. The alkyl group can be cyclic or acyclic. The alkyl group can be branched or unbranched. The alkyl group can also be substituted or unsubstituted. For example, the alkyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein. A“lower alkyl” group is an alkyl group containing from one to six (e.g., from one to four) carbon atoms. The term alkyl group can also be a Cl alkyl, C1-C2 alkyl, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C5 alkyl, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C7 alkyl, C1-C8 alkyl, C1-C9 alkyl, C1-C10 alkyl, and the like up to and including a C1-C24 alkyl.
[0042] Throughout the specification“alkyl” is generally used to refer to both unsubstituted alkyl groups and substituted alkyl groups; however, substituted alkyl groups are also specifically referred to herein by identifying the specific substituent(s) on the alkyl group.
For example, the term“halogenated alkyl” or“haloalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more halide, e.g., fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.
Alternatively, the term“monohaloalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with a single halide, e.g. fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine. The term “polyhaloalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is independently substituted with two or more halides, i.e. each halide substituent need not be the same halide as another halide substituent, nor do the multiple instances of a halide substituent need to be on the same carbon. The term“alkoxyalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more alkoxy groups, as described below. The term“aminoalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more amino groups. The term“hydroxyalkyl” specifically refers to an alkyl group that is substituted with one or more hydroxy groups. When“alkyl” is used in one instance and a specific term such as“hydroxyalkyl” is used in another, it is not meant to imply that the term“alkyl” does not also refer to specific terms such as“hydroxyalkyl” and the like.
[0043] This practice is also used for other groups described herein. That is, while a term such as“cycloalkyl” refers to both unsubstituted and substituted cycloalkyl moieties, the substituted moieties can, in addition, be specifically identified herein; for example, a particular substituted cycloalkyl can be referred to as, e.g., an“alky ley cloalkyl.” Similarly, a substituted alkoxy can be specifically referred to as, e.g., a“halogenated alkoxy,” a particular substituted alkenyl can be, e.g., an“alkenylalcohol,” and the like. Again, the practice of using a general term, such as“cycloalkyl,” and a specific term, such as“alkylcycloalkyl,” is not meant to imply that the general term does not also include the specific term. [0044] The term“cycloalkyl” as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring composed of at least three carbon atoms. Examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, norbomyl, and the like. The term “heterocycloalkyl” is a type of cycloalkyl group as defined above, and is included within the meaning of the term“cycloalkyl,” where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus. The cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. For example, the cycloalkyl group and heterocycloalkyl group can be substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, -NH2, (C1-C4) alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, ether, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, -N02, silyl, sulfo-oxo, -SH, and C1-C4 thioalkyl, as described herein.
[0045] The term“polyalkylene group” as used herein is a group having two or more CTT groups linked to one another. The polyalkylene group can be represented by the formula— (CH2)a— , where“a” is an integer of from 2 to 500.
[0046] The terms“alkoxy” and“alkoxyl” as used herein to refer to an alkyl or cycloalkyl group bonded through an ether linkage; that is, an“alkoxy” group can be defined as— OA1 where A1 is alkyl or cycloalkyl as defined above. “Alkoxy” also includes polymers of alkoxy groups as just described; that is, an alkoxy can be a poly ether such as— OA1— OA2 or— OA1— (OA2)a— OA3, where“a” is an integer of from 1 to 200 and A1, A2, and A3 are alkyl and/or cycloalkyl groups.
[0047] The term“alkenyl” as used herein is a hydrocarbon group of from 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
Asymmetric structures such as (A1A2)C=C(A3A4) are intended to include both the E and Z isomers. This can be presumed in structural formulae herein wherein an asymmetric alkene is present, or it can be explicitly indicated by the bond symbol C=C. The alkenyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
[0048] The term“cycloalkenyl” as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring composed of at least three carbon atoms and containing at least one carbon-carbon double bound, i.e., C=C. Examples of cycloalkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropenyl, cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexenyl,
cyclohexadienyl, norbomenyl, and the like. The term“heterocycloalkenyl” is a type of cycloalkenyl group as defined above, and is included within the meaning of the term “cycloalkenyl,” where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus. The cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. For example, the cycloalkenyl group and heterocycloalkenyl group can be substituted with 0, 1,
2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from C1-C4 alkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C2-C4 alkenyl, C3-C6 cycloalkenyl, C2-C4 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldeyhyde, -NEE, (Cl- C4) alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, ketone, azide, -N02, silyl, sulfo-oxo, -SH, and C1-C4 thioalkyl, as described herein.
[0049] The term“alkynyl” as used herein is a hydrocarbon group of 2 to 24 carbon atoms with a structural formula containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. The alkynyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol, as described herein.
[0050] The term“cycloalkynyl” as used herein is a non-aromatic carbon-based ring composed of at least seven carbon atoms and containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bound. Examples of cycloalkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, cycloheptynyl, cyclooctynyl, cyclononynyl, and the like. The term“heterocycloalkynyl” is a type of cycloalkenyl group as defined above, and is included within the meaning of the term “cycloalkynyl,” where at least one of the carbon atoms of the ring is replaced with a heteroatom such as, but not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, or phosphorus. The cycloalkynyl group and heterocycloalkynyl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The cycloalkynyl group and heterocycloalkynyl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde, amino, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein. [0051] The term“aromatic group” as used herein refers to a ring structure having cyclic clouds of delocalized p electrons above and below the plane of the molecule, where the p clouds contain (4n+2) p electrons. A further discussion of aromaticity is found in Morrison and Boyd, Organic Chemistry, (5th Ed., 1987), Chapter 13, entitled“Aromaticity,” pages 477-497, incorporated herein by reference. The term“aromatic group” is inclusive of both aryl and heteroaryl groups.
[0052] The term“aryl” as used herein is a group that contains any carbon-based aromatic group including, but not limited to, benzene, naphthalene, phenyl, biphenyl, anthracene, and the like. The aryl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The aryl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aldehyde,— NEE, carboxylic acid, ester, ether, halide, hydroxy, ketone, azide, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein. The term“biaryl” is a specific type of aryl group and is included in the definition of“aryl.” In addition, the aryl group can be a single ring structure or comprise multiple ring structures that are either fused ring structures or attached via one or more bridging groups such as a carbon- carbon bond. For example, biaryl can be two aryl groups that are bound together via a fused ring structure, as in naphthalene, or are attached via one or more carbon-carbon bonds, as in biphenyl.
[0053] The term“aldehyde” as used herein is represented by the formula— C(0)H.
Throughout this specification“C(O)” or“CO” is a short hand notation for a carbonyl group, i.e., C=0.
[0054] The terms“amine” or“amino” as used herein are represented by the formula—
NA1 A2 where A1 and A2 can be, independently, hydrogen or alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. A specific example of amino is— NEE.
[0055] The term“alkylamino” as used herein is represented by the formula— NH(-alkyl) where alkyl is a described herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylamino group, ethylamino group, propylamino group, isopropylamino group, butylamino group, isobutylamino group, (sec-butyl)amino group, (tert-butyl)amino group, pentylamino group, isopentylamino group, (tert-pentyl)amino group, hexylamino group, and the like. [0056] The term“dialkylamino” as used herein is represented by the formula— N(-alkyl)2 where alkyl is a described herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, dimethylamino group, diethylamino group, dipropylamino group, diisopropylamino group, dibutylamino group, diisobutylamino group, di(sec-butyl)amino group, di(tert-butyl)amino group, dipentylamino group, diisopentylamino group, di(tert-pentyl)amino group, dihexylamino group, N-ethyl-N-methylamino group, N-methyl-N-propylamino group, N- ethyl-N-propylamino group and the like.
[0057] The term“carboxylic acid” as used herein is represented by the formula— C(0)OH.
[0058] The term“ester” as used herein is represented by the formula— 0C(0)A1 or— C(0)0A1, where A1 can be alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. The term“polyester” as used herein is represented by the formula— (A10(0)C-A2-C(0)0)a— or— (A10(0)C-A2-0C(0))a— , where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and“a” is an integer from 1 to 500. “Polyester” is as the term used to describe a group that is produced by the reaction between a compound having at least two carboxylic acid groups with a compound having at least two hydroxyl groups.
[0059] The term“ether” as used herein is represented by the formula A'OA2. where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein. The term“polyether” as used herein is represented by the formula— (A10-A20)a— , where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group described herein and“a” is an integer of from 1 to 500. Examples of polyether groups include polyethylene oxide, polypropylene oxide, and polybutylene oxide.
[0060] The terms“halo,”“halogen,” or“halide,” as used herein can be used interchangeably and refer to F, Cl, Br, or I.
[0061] The terms“pseudohalide,”“pseudohalogen,” or“pseudohalo,” as used herein can be used interchangeably and refer to functional groups that behave substantially similar to halides. Such functional groups include, by way of example, cyano, thiocyanato, azido, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, perfluoroalkyl, and perfluoroalkoxy groups. [0062] The term“heteroalkyl,” as used herein refers to an alkyl group containing at least one heteroatom. Suitable heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, O, N, Si, P and S, wherein the nitrogen, phosphorous and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen heteroatom is optionally quatemized. Heteroalkyls can be substituted as defined above for alkyl groups.
[0063] The term“heteroaryl,” as used herein refers to an aromatic group that has at least one heteroatom incorporated within the ring of the aromatic group. Examples of heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and phosphorus, where N-oxides, sulfur oxides, and dioxides are permissible heteroatom substitutions. The heteroaryl group can be substituted or unsubstituted. The heteroaryl group can be substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, amino, ether, halide, hydroxy, nitro, silyl, sulfo-oxo, or thiol as described herein. Heteroaryl groups can be monocyclic, or alternatively fused ring systems. Heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, furyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, tetrazolyl, thienyl, pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, /V-methylpyrrolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, benzofuranyl, benzodioxolyl, benzothiophenyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, imidazopyridinyl, pyrazolopyridinyl, and pyrazolopyrimidinyl. Further not limiting examples of heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, pyridinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, thiophenyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, benzofri] oxazolyl, benzo| c/| thiazolyl. quinolinyl, quinazolinyl, indazolyl, imidazo[l,2-b]pyridazinyl, imidazo[l,2-a]pyrazinyl, benzo[c][l,2,5]thiadiazolyl, benzo[c][ 1,2, 5] oxadiazolyl, and pyrido[2,3-b]pyrazinyl.
[0064] The terms“heterocycle” or“heterocyclyl,” as used herein can be used
interchangeably and refer to single and multi-cyclic aromatic or non-aromatic ring systems in which at least one of the ring members is other than carbon. Thus, the term is inclusive of, but not limited to,“heterocycloalkyl”,“heteroaryl”,“bicyclic heterocycle” and“polycyclic heterocycle.” Heterocycle includes pyridine, pyrimidine, furan, thiophene, pyrrole, isoxazole, isothiazole, pyrazole, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, oxazole, including, 1,2,3- oxadiazole, l,2,5-oxadiazole and l,3,4-oxadiazole, thiadiazole, including, l,2,3-thiadiazole, l,2,5-thiadiazole, and l,3,4-thiadiazole, triazole, including, 1,2, 3-triazole, 1,3, 4-triazole, tetrazole, including l,2,3,4-tetrazole and l,2,4,5-tetrazole, pyridazine, pyrazine, triazine, including l,2,4-triazine and l,3,5-triazine, tetrazine, including l,2,4,5-tetrazine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, azetidine, tetrahydropyran, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and the like. The term heterocyclyl group can also be a C2 heterocyclyl, C2-C3 heterocyclyl, C2- C4 heterocyclyl, C2-C5 heterocyclyl, C2-C6 heterocyclyl, C2-C7 heterocyclyl, C2-C8 heterocyclyl, C2-C9 heterocyclyl, C2-C10 heterocyclyl, C2-C11 heterocyclyl, and the like up to and including a C2-C18 heterocyclyl. For example, a C2 heterocyclyl comprises a group which has two carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom, including, but not limited to, aziridinyl, diazetidinyl, dihydrodiazetyl, oxiranyl, thiiranyl, and the like. Alternatively, for example, a C5 heterocyclyl comprises a group which has five carbon atoms and at least one heteroatom, including, but not limited to, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,
tetrahydrothiopyranyl, diazepanyl, pyridinyl, and the like. It is understood that a heterocyclyl group may be bound either through a heteroatom in the ring, where chemically possible, or one of carbons comprising the heterocyclyl ring.
[0065] The term“bicyclic heterocycle” or“bicyclic heterocyclyl,” as used herein refers to a ring system in which at least one of the ring members is other than carbon. Bicyclic heterocyclyl encompasses ring systems wherein an aromatic ring is fused with another aromatic ring, or wherein an aromatic ring is fused with a non-aromatic ring. Bicyclic heterocyclyl encompasses ring systems wherein a benzene ring is fused to a 5- or a 6- membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms or wherein a pyridine ring is fused to a 5- or a 6-membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms. Bicyclic heterocyclic groups include, but are not limited to, indolyl, indazolyl, pyrazolo[l,5-a]pyridinyl, benzofuranyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, l,3-benzodioxolyl, 2,3-dihydro-l,4-benzodioxinyl, 3,4-dihydro-2H- chromenyl, lH-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-3-yl; lH-pyrrolo[3,2-b]pyridin-3-yl; and 1H- pyrazolo[3,2-b]pyridin-3-yl.
[0066] The term“heterocycloalkyl” as used herein refers to an aliphatic, partially unsaturated or fully saturated, 3- to l4-membered ring system, including single rings of 3 to 8 atoms and bi- and tricyclic ring systems. The heterocycloalkyl ring-systems include one to four heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, wherein a nitrogen and sulfur heteroatom optionally can be oxidized and a nitrogen heteroatom optionally can be substituted. Representative heterocycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, and tetrahydrofuryl. [0067] The term“hydroxy” or“hydroxyl” as used herein is represented by the formula— OH.
[0068] The term“ketone” as used herein is represented by the formula A1C(0)A2, where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
[0069] The term“azide” or“azido” as used herein is represented by the formula— N3.
[0070] The term“nitro” as used herein is represented by the formula— NO2.
[0071] The term“nitrile” or“cyano” as used herein is represented by the formula— CN or— CºN.
[0072] The term“silyl” as used herein is represented by the formula— SiA1A2A3, where A1, A2, and A3 can be, independently, hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
[0073] The term“sulfo-oxo” as used herein is represented by the formulas— S(0)A'.— SiO^A1,— 0S(0)2A1, or— 0S(0)20A1, where A1 can be hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. Throughout this specification“S(O)” is a short hand notation for S=0. The term“sulfonyl” is used herein to refer to the sulfo-oxo group represented by the formula— S(0)2A1, where A1 can be hydrogen or an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. The term“sulfone” as used herein is represented by the formula A1S(0)2A2, where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein. The term“sulfoxide” as used herein is represented by the formula A1S(0)A2, where A1 and A2 can be, independently, an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkynyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group as described herein.
[0074] The term“thiol” as used herein is represented by the formula— SH.
[0075]“R1,”“R2,”“R3,”“Rn,” where n is an integer, as used herein can, independently, possess one or more of the groups listed above. For example, if R1 is a straight chain alkyl group, one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group can optionally be substituted with a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl group, a halide, and the like. Depending upon the groups that are selected, a first group can be incorporated within second group or, alternatively, the first group can be pendant (i.e.. attached) to the second group. For example, with the phrase“an alkyl group comprising an amino group,” the amino group can be incorporated within the backbone of the alkyl group. Alternatively, the amino group can be attached to the backbone of the alkyl group. The nature of the group(s) that is (are) selected will determine if the first group is embedded or attached to the second group.
[0076] As described herein, compounds of the invention may contain“optionally substituted” moieties. In general, the term“substituted,” whether preceded by the term“optionally” or not, means that one or more hydrogen of the designated moiety are replaced with a suitable substituent. Unless otherwise indicated, an“optionally substituted” group may have a suitable substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position. Combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds. In is also contemplated that, in certain aspects, unless expressly indicated to the contrary, individual substituents can be further optionally substituted (i.e.. further substituted or unsubstituted).
[0077] The term“stable,” as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, in certain aspects, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
[0078] Suitable monovalent substituents on a substitutable carbon atom of an“optionally substituted” group are independently halogen; -(CFb)o-4R°; -(CTF)o 4OR0: -0(CH2)o-4R°, - 0-(CH2)O^C(0)OR°; -(CH2)O 4CH(OR°)2; -(CH2)O 4SR°; -(CH2)O 4Ph, which may be substituted with R°; -(CH2)o-40(CH2)o iPh which may be substituted with R°; -CH=CHPh, which may be substituted with R°; -(CH2)o^O(CH2)o i-pyridyl which may be substituted with R°; -N02; -CN; -N3; -(CH2)O 4N(R°)2; -(CH2)O 4N(R°)C(0)R°; -N(R°)C(S)R°; - (CH2)O 4N(R°)C(0)NR0 2; -N(R°)C(S)NR°2; -(CH2)O 4N(R°)C(0)OR°; - N(R°)N(R°)C(0)R°; -N(R°)N(R°)C(0)NR0 2; -N(R°)N(R°)C(0)OR°; -(CH2)0 4C(0)R°; - C(S)R°; -(CFF)o 4C(0)OR°: -(CH2)O^C(0)SR°; -(CH2)O 4C(0)0SiR°3; -(CH2)0 4OC(0)R°; -OC(0)(CH2)o 4SR-, SC(S)SR°; -(CH2)o 4SC(0)R°: -(CH2)0 4C(0)NR°2; -C(S)NR°2; - C(S)SR°; -(CH2)O 40C(0)NR°2; -C(0)N(OR°)R°; -C(0)C(0)R°; -C(0)CH2C(0)R°; - C(NOR°)R°; -(CH2)O 4SSR°; -(CH2)O 4S(0)2R°; -(CH2)O 4S(0)20R°; -(CH2)O 40S(0)2R°; - S(0)2NR°2; -(CH2)O 4S(0)R°: -N(R°)S(0)2NR°2; -N(R°)S(0)2R°; -N(OR°)R°; - C(NH)NR°2; -P(0)2R°; -P(0)R°2; -0P(0)R°2; -0P(0)(0R°)2; SiR°3; -(Ci^ straight or branched alkylene)0-N(R°)2; or -(Ci-4 straight or branched alkylene)C(0)0-N(R°)2, wherein each R° may be substituted as defined below and is independently hydrogen, Ci- 6 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)o iPh, -CH2-(5-6 membered heteroaryl ring), or a 5-6- membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R°, taken together with their intervening atom(s), form a 3-12- membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, which may be substituted as defined below.
[0079] Suitable monovalent substituents on R° (or the ring formed by taking two independent occurrences of R° together with their intervening atoms), are independently halogen, - (CH2)O 2R·, -(haloR*), -(CH2)o 2OH, -(CH2)o 2OR*, -(CH2)o 2CH(OR*)2; -0(haloR*), -CN, -N3, -(CH2)O 2C(0)R·, -(CH2)O 2C(0)0H, -(CH2)O 2C(0)0R·, -(CH2)O 2SR·, -(CH2)O 2SH, -(CH2)Q 2NH2, -(CH2)O 2NHR·, -(CH2)O 2NR*2, -N02, -SiR*3, -OSiR*3, -C(0)SR* -(Ci 4 straight or branched alkylene)C(0)0R*, or -SSR* wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently selected from C i 4 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)o iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of R° include =0 and =S.
[0080] Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of an“optionally substituted” group include the following: =0, =S, =NNR* 2, =NNHC(0)R*, =NNHC(0)0R*, =NNHS(0)2R*, =NR*, =NOR*, -0(C(R* 2))2 30-, or -S(C(R* 2))2-3S-, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, Ci-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents that are bound to vicinal substitutable carbons of an“optionally substituted” group include: -0(CR* 2)2 30-. wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
[0081] Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R* include halogen, - R·, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -0(haloR*), -CN, -C(0)0H, -C(0)0R*, -NH2, -NHR*, -NR*2, or -N02, wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently Ci-4 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)o iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
[0082] Suitable substituents on a substitutable nitrogen of an“optionally substituted” group include -R, -NR 2, -C(0)R, -C(0)OR, -C(0)C(0)R, -C(0)CH2C(0)R, - S(0)2R. -S(0)2NR 2, -C(S)NR 2, -C(NH)NR 2, or -N(R)S(0)2R: wherein each R is independently hydrogen, Ci-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, unsubstituted -OPh, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R, taken together with their intervening atom(s) form an unsubstituted 3-l2-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
[0083] Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R are independently halogen, - R*, -(haloR*), -OH, -OR*, -0(haloR*), -CN, -C(0)OH, -C(0)OR*, -NH2, -NHR*, -NR*2, or -N02, wherein each R* is unsubstituted or where preceded by“halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently Ci-4 aliphatic, -CH2Ph, -0(CH2)o iPh, or a 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
[0084] The term“leaving group” refers to an atom (or a group of atoms) with electron withdrawing ability that can be displaced as a stable species, taking with it the bonding electrons. Examples of suitable leaving groups include halides and sulfonate esters, including, but not limited to, triflate, mesylate, tosylate, and brosylate.
[0085] The terms“hydrolysable group” and“hydrolysable moiety” refer to a functional group capable of undergoing hydrolysis, e.g., under basic or acidic conditions. Examples of hydrolysable residues include, without limitation, acid halides, activated carboxylic acids, and various protecting groups known in the art (see, for example,“Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis,” T. W. Greene, P. G. M. Wuts, Wiley-Interscience, 1999).
[0086] The term“organic residue” defines a carbon containing residue, i.e. , a residue comprising at least one carbon atom, and includes but is not limited to the carbon-containing groups, residues, or radicals defined hereinabove. Organic residues can contain various heteroatoms, or be bonded to another molecule through a heteroatom, including oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or the like. Examples of organic residues include but are not limited alkyl or substituted alkyls, alkoxy or substituted alkoxy, mono or di-substituted amino, amide groups, etc. Organic residues can preferably comprise 1 to 18 carbon atoms, 1 to 15, carbon atoms, 1 to 12 carbon atoms, 1 to 8 carbon atoms, 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 4 carbon atoms. In a further aspect, an organic residue can comprise 2 to 18 carbon atoms, 2 to 15, carbon atoms, 2 to 12 carbon atoms, 2 to 8 carbon atoms, 2 to 4 carbon atoms, or 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
[0087] A very close synonym of the term“residue” is the term“radical,” which as used in the specification and concluding claims, refers to a fragment, group, or substructure of a molecule described herein, regardless of how the molecule is prepared. For example, a 2,4- thiazobdinedione radical in a particular compound has the structure:
Figure imgf000027_0001
regardless of whether thiazobdinedione is used to prepare the compound. In some embodiments the radical (for example an alkyl) can be further modified (i.e.. substituted alkyl) by having bonded thereto one or more“substituent radicals.” The number of atoms in a given radical is not critical to the present invention unless it is indicated to the contrary elsewhere herein.
[0088]“Organic radicals,” as the term is defined and used herein, contain one or more carbon atoms. An organic radical can have, for example, 1-26 carbon atoms, 1-18 carbon atoms, 1- 12 carbon atoms, 1-8 carbon atoms, 1-6 carbon atoms, or 1-4 carbon atoms. In a further aspect, an organic radical can have 2-26 carbon atoms, 2-18 carbon atoms, 2-12 carbon atoms, 2-8 carbon atoms, 2-6 carbon atoms, or 2-4 carbon atoms. Organic radicals often have hydrogen bound to at least some of the carbon atoms of the organic radical. One example, of an organic radical that comprises no inorganic atoms is a 5, 6, 7, 8-tetrahydro-2-naphthyl radical. In some embodiments, an organic radical can contain 1-10 inorganic heteroatoms bound thereto or therein, including halogens, oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, and the like. Examples of organic radicals include but are not limited to an alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, mono-substituted amino, di-substituted amino, acyloxy, cyano, carboxy, carboalkoxy, alkylcarboxamide, substituted alkylcarboxamide,
dialkylcarboxamide, substituted dialkylcarboxamide, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfmyl, thioalkyl, thiohaloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, or substituted heterocyclic radicals, wherein the terms are defined elsewhere herein. A few non-limiting examples of organic radicals that include heteroatoms include alkoxy radicals, trifluoromethoxy radicals, acetoxy radicals, dimethylamino radicals and the like.
[0089] “Inorganic radicals,” as the term is defined and used herein, contain no carbon atoms and therefore comprise only atoms other than carbon. Inorganic radicals comprise bonded combinations of atoms selected from hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, silicon, phosphorus, sulfur, selenium, and halogens such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, which can be present individually or bonded together in their chemically stable combinations. Inorganic radicals have 10 or fewer, or preferably one to six or one to four inorganic atoms as listed above bonded together. Examples of inorganic radicals include, but not limited to, amino, hydroxy, halogens, nitro, thiol, sulfate, phosphate, and like commonly known inorganic radicals. The inorganic radicals do not have bonded therein the metallic elements of the periodic table (such as the alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, transition metals, lanthanide metals, or actinide metals), although such metal ions can sometimes serve as a pharmaceutically acceptable cation for anionic inorganic radicals such as a sulfate, phosphate, or like anionic inorganic radical. Inorganic radicals do not comprise metalloids elements such as boron, aluminum, gallium, germanium, arsenic, tin, lead, or tellurium, or the noble gas elements, unless otherwise specifically indicated elsewhere herein.
[0090] Compounds described herein can contain one or more double bonds and, thus, potentially give rise to cis/trans (E/Z) isomers, as well as other conformational isomers. Unless stated to the contrary, the invention includes all such possible isomers, as well as mixtures of such isomers. [0091] Unless stated to the contrary, a formula with chemical bonds shown only as solid lines and not as wedges or dashed lines contemplates each possible isomer, e.g., each enantiomer and diastereomer, and a mixture of isomers, such as a racemic or scalemic mixture.
Compounds described herein can contain one or more asymmetric centers and, thus, potentially give rise to diastereomers and optical isomers. Unless stated to the contrary, the present invention includes all such possible diastereomers as well as their racemic mixtures, their substantially pure resolved enantiomers, all possible geometric isomers, and
pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. Mixtures of stereoisomers, as well as isolated specific stereoisomers, are also included. During the course of the synthetic procedures used to prepare such compounds, or in using racemization or epimerization procedures known to those skilled in the art, the products of such procedures can be a mixture of stereoisomers.
[0092] Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms having the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L or R and S are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and 1 or (+) and (-) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (-) or meaning that the compound is levorotatory. A compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these compounds, called stereoisomers, are identical except that they are non- superimposable mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer can also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture. Many of the compounds described herein can have one or more chiral centers and therefore can exist in different enantiomeric forms. If desired, a chiral carbon can be designated with an asterisk (*). When bonds to the chiral carbon are depicted as straight lines in the disclosed formulas, it is understood that both the (R) and (S) configurations of the chiral carbon, and hence both enantiomers and mixtures thereof, are embraced within the formula. As is used in the art, when it is desired to specify the absolute configuration about a chiral carbon, one of the bonds to the chiral carbon can be depicted as a wedge (bonds to atoms above the plane) and the other can be depicted as a series or wedge of short parallel lines is (bonds to atoms below the plane). The Cahn-Ingold-Prelog system can be used to assign the (R) or (S) configuration to a chiral carbon.
[0093] Compounds described herein comprise atoms in both their natural isotopic abundance and in non-natural abundance. The disclosed compounds can be isotopically-labeled or isotopically-substituted compounds identical to those described, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number typically found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 O, 17 0, 35 S, 18 F and 36 Cl, respectively. Compounds further comprise prodrugs thereof, and
pharmaceutically acceptable salts of said compounds or of said prodrugs which contain the aforementioned isotopes and/or other isotopes of other atoms are within the scope of this invention. Certain isotopically-labeled compounds of the present invention, for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3 H and 14 C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated, i.e. , 3 H, and carbon-l4, /. e.. 14 C, isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further, substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e. , 2 H, can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
Isotopically labeled compounds of the present invention and prodrugs thereof can generally be prepared by carrying out the procedures below, by substituting a readily available isotopically labeled reagent for a non- isotopically labeled reagent.
[0094] The compounds described in the invention can be present as a solvate. In some cases, the solvent used to prepare the solvate is an aqueous solution, and the solvate is then often referred to as a hydrate. The compounds can be present as a hydrate, which can be obtained, for example, by crystallization from a solvent or from aqueous solution. In this connection, one, two, three or any arbitrary number of solvent or water molecules can combine with the compounds according to the invention to form solvates and hydrates. Unless stated to the contrary, the invention includes all such possible solvates.
[0095] The term“co-crystal” means a physical association of two or more molecules which owe their stability through non-covalent interaction. One or more components of this molecular complex provide a stable framework in the crystalline latice. In certain instances, the guest molecules are incorporated in the crystalline lathee as anhydrates or solvates, see e.g.“Crystal Engineering of the Composition of Pharmaceutical Phases. Do Pharmaceutical Co-crystals Represent a New Path to Improved Medicines?” Almarasson, O., et. al, The Royal Society of Chemistry, 1889-1896, 2004. Examples of co-crystals include p- toluenesulfonic acid and benzenesulfonic acid.
[0096] It is also appreciated that certain compounds described herein can be present as an equilibrium of tautomers. For example, ketones with an a-hydrogen can exist in an equilibrium of the keto form and the enol form.
Figure imgf000031_0001
keto form enol form amide form imidic acid form
Likewise, amides with an N-hydrogen can exist in an equilibrium of the amide form and the imidic acid form. As another example, pyrazoles can exist in two tautomeric forms, N1- unsubstituted, 3-A3 and A1 -unsubstituted, 5-A3 as shown below.
Figure imgf000031_0002
Unless stated to the contrary, the invention includes all such possible tautomers.
[0097] It is known that chemical substances form solids which are present in different states of order which are termed polymorphic forms or modifications. The different modifications of a polymorphic substance can differ greatly in their physical properties. The compounds according to the invention can be present in different polymorphic forms, with it being possible for particular modifications to be metastable. Unless stated to the contrary, the invention includes all such possible polymorphic forms.
[0098] In some aspects, a structure of a compound can be represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000031_0003
which is understood to be equivalent to a formula:
Figure imgf000032_0001
wherein n is typically an integer. That is, R" is understood to represent five independent substituents, R"(a), R",bl. R"(c), R"(d), R"(e). By“independent substituents,” it is meant that each R substituent can be independently defined. For example, if in one instance R"(a) is halogen, then R",bl is not necessarily halogen in that instance.
[0099] Certain materials, compounds, compositions, and components disclosed herein can be obtained commercially or readily synthesized using techniques generally known to those of skill in the art. For example, the starting materials and reagents used in preparing the disclosed compounds and compositions are either available from commercial suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Co., (Milwaukee, Wis.), Acros Organics (Morris Plains, N.J.), Fisher Scientific (Pittsburgh, Pa.), or Sigma (St. Louis, Mo.) or are prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art following procedures set forth in references such as Fieser and Fieser’s Reagents for Organic Synthesis, Volumes 1-17 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); Rodd’s Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Volumes 1-5 and supplemental volumes (Elsevier Science Publishers, 1989); Organic Reactions, Volumes 1-40 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991); March’s Advanced Organic Chemistry, (John Wiley and Sons, 4th Edition); and Larock’s
Comprehensive Organic Transformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1989).
[00100] Unless otherwise expressly stated, it is in no way intended that any method set forth herein be construed as requiring that its steps be performed in a specific order.
Accordingly, where a method claim does not actually recite an order to be followed by its steps or it is not otherwise specifically stated in the claims or descriptions that the steps are to be limited to a specific order, it is no way intended that an order be inferred, in any respect. This holds for any possible non-express basis for interpretation, including: matters of logic with respect to arrangement of steps or operational flow; plain meaning derived from grammatical organization or punctuation; and the number or type of embodiments described in the specification.
[00101] Disclosed are the components to be used to prepare the compositions of the invention as well as the compositions themselves to be used within the methods disclosed herein. These and other materials are disclosed herein, and it is understood that when combinations, subsets, interactions, groups, etc. of these materials are disclosed that while specific reference of each various individual and collective combinations and permutation of these compounds cannot be explicitly disclosed, each is specifically contemplated and described herein. For example, if a particular compound is disclosed and discussed and a number of modifications that can be made to a number of molecules including the compounds are discussed, specifically contemplated is each and every combination and permutation of the compound and the modifications that are possible unless specifically indicated to the contrary. Thus, if a class of molecules A, B, and C are disclosed as well as a class of molecules D, E, and F and an example of a combination molecule, A-D is disclosed, then even if each is not individually recited each is individually and collectively
contemplated meaning combinations, A-E, A-F, B-D, B-E, B-F, C-D, C-E, and C-F are considered disclosed. Likewise, any subset or combination of these is also disclosed. Thus, for example, the sub-group of A-E, B-F, and C-E would be considered disclosed. This concept applies to all aspects of this application including, but not limited to, steps in methods of making and using the compositions of the invention. Thus, if there are a variety of additional steps that can be performed it is understood that each of these additional steps can be performed with any specific embodiment or combination of embodiments of the methods of the invention.
[00102] It is understood that the compositions disclosed herein have certain functions. Disclosed herein are certain structural requirements for performing the disclosed functions, and it is understood that there are a variety of structures that can perform the same function that are related to the disclosed structures, and that these structures will typically achieve the same result.
B. COMPOUNDS
[00103] In one aspect, disclosed are compounds useful in treating or preventing a disorder associated with PanK activity such as, for example, PKAN and diabetes. In a further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit modulation of PanK activity. In a still further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit inhibition of PanK activity. In yet a further aspect, the disclosed compounds exhibit activation of PanK activity.
[00104] In one aspect, the compounds of the invention are useful in the treatment or prevention of disorders associated with PanK dysfunction and other diseases in which PanKs or altered levels of CoA and CoA esters are involved, as further described herein.
[00105] It is contemplated that each disclosed derivative can be optionally further substituted. It is also contemplated that any one or more derivative can be optionally omitted from the invention. It is understood that a disclosed compound can be provided by the disclosed methods. It is also understood that the disclosed compounds can be employed in the disclosed methods of using.
1. STRUCTURE
[00106] In one aspect, disclosed are compounds having a structure represented by a formula selected from:
Figure imgf000034_0001
wherein A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH2C(0), CF2C(0), C(0)CH2, CH2S02, S02, NHC(O), N(CH3)C(0), and CH(0H)C(0); wherein each of Q1 and Q2, when present, is independently selected from N and CH; wherein Q3 is N and Q4 is CH or wherein Q3 is N and Q4 is CH; wherein Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000034_0002
Figure imgf000035_0001
wherein each of Rla and Rlb, when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 thioalkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy; wherein R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -N02, -SO2NH2, and -SO2CH3; wherein R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl), provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group; and wherein Ar1, when present, is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl), provided that when R3 is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl or C1-C8 alkoxy then R2 is not hydrogen, and provided that when each of Rla and Rlb is hydrogen then one of Q3 and Q4 is N, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00107] In a further aspect, the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000036_0001
[00108] In a further aspect, the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000036_0002
[00109] In a further aspect, the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000036_0003
[00110] In a further aspect, the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000036_0004
[00111] In a further aspect, the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000036_0005
[00112] In a further aspect, the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000036_0006
[00113] In a further aspect, the compound is selected from:
Figure imgf000037_0001
[00114] In a further aspect, the compound is:
Figure imgf000037_0002
, a. A GROUPS
[00115] In one aspect, A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH2C(OX CF2C(0), C(0)CH2, CH2S02, S02, NHC(O), N(CH3)C(0), and CH(0H)C(0).
[00116] In a further aspect, A is selected from OC(O) and C(O). In a still further aspect, A is OC(O). In yet a further aspect, A is C(O).
[00117] In a further aspect, A is selected from CH2C(0), CF2C(0), and C(0)CH2. In a further aspect, A is selected from CH2C(0) and C(0)CH2. In yet a further aspect, A is CH2C(0). In an even further aspect, A is C(0)CH2. In a still further aspect, A is CF2C(0).
In yet a further aspect, A is selected from CH2C(0) and CF2C(0).
[00118] In a further aspect, A is selected from CH2S02 and S02. In a still further aspect, A is CH2S02. In yet a further aspect, A is S02.
[00119] In a further aspect, A is selected from NHC(O) and N(CH3)C(0). In a still further aspect, A is NHC(O). In yet a further aspect, A is N(CH3)C(0).
[00120] In a further aspect, A is selected from CH2C(0) and CH(0H)C(0). In a still further aspect, A is CH2C(0). In yet a further aspect, A is CH(0H)C(0). b. Q1 AND Q2 GROUPS
[00121] In one aspect, each of Q1 and Q2, when present, is independently selected from N and CH. In a further aspect, each of Q1 and Q2, when present, is N. In a still further aspect, each of Q1 and Q2, when present, is CH. In yet a further aspect, one of Q1 and Q2, when present, is N and one of Q1 and Q2, when present, is CH.
[00122] In a further aspect, Q1 is N and Q2 is CH. In a still further aspect, Q1 is CH and Q2 is N. c. Q3 AND Q4 GROUPS
[00123] In one aspect, Q3 is N and Q4 is CH or Q4 is N and Q3 is CH. In a further aspect, Q3 is N and Q4 is CH. In a still further aspect, Q4 is N and Q3 is CH. d. Z GROUPS
[00124] In one aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000039_0001
[00125] In one aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000040_0001
[00126] In one aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000040_0002
Figure imgf000041_0001
[00127] In a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000041_0002
Figure imgf000042_0001
[00128] In a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000042_0002
[00129] In a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000042_0003
Figure imgf000043_0001
[00130] In a further aspect, wherein Z i a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000043_0002
Figure imgf000044_0001
[00131] In a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000044_0002
[00132] In a still further aspect, Z is:
Figure imgf000044_0003
[00133] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000045_0001
[00134] In an even further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000045_0002
[00135] In a still further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000045_0003
[00136] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000045_0004
[00137] In a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000045_0005
Figure imgf000046_0001
[00138] In a still further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000046_0002
[00139] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000046_0003
[00140] In an even further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000047_0001
[00141] In a still further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000047_0002
[00142] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000047_0003
[00143] In an even further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000048_0001
[00144] In a still further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000048_0002
[00145] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000048_0003
[00146] In an even further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000048_0004
[00147] In a still further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000049_0001
[00148] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000049_0002
[00149] In a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000049_0003
Figure imgf000050_0001
[00150] In a still further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000050_0002
[00151] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000050_0003
[00152] In an even further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000051_0001
[00153] In a still further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000051_0002
[00154] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000051_0003
[00155] In an even further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000052_0001
[00156] In a still further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000052_0002
[00157] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000052_0003
[00158] In an even further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000052_0004
[00159] In a still further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000053_0001
[00160] In yet a further aspect, Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000053_0002
[00161] In a further aspect, Z is:
Figure imgf000053_0003
e. R1A AND RlB GROUPS
[00162] In one aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 thioalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, and C1-C4 alkyl. In a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4 thioalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, and C1-C4 alkyl. In a still further aspect, one of Rla and Rlb is hydrogen and one of Rla and Rlb is -OH.
[00163] In one aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, and C1-C4 alkyl. In a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is hydrogen.
[00164] In one aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy.
[00165] In a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, /-propyl, «-butyl, /-butyl, /-butyl, and s- butyl. In a still further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, - F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, and /-propyl. In yet a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, and ethyl. In an even further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, and methyl. [00166] In a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, /-propyl, -OCH3, -OCH2CH3, - 0(CH2)2CH3, and -OCH(CH3)2. In a still further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, ethyl, -OCH3, and -OCFhCFb. In yet a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, -Br, methyl, and -OCH3.
[00167] In a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 thioalkyl. In a still further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -SCH3, -SCFBCFb, -SCFhCFhCFb, and -SCH(CH3)2 . In yet a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -SCH3, and - SCFBCFb. In an even further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and -SCFBCFb. In a still further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and -SCH3.
[00168] In a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and C1-C4 alkyl. In a still further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, «-propyl, and /-propyl. In yet a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, methyl, and ethyl. In an even further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and ethyl. In a still further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and methyl.
[00169] In a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, and -Br. In a still further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen, -F, and -Cl. In yet a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and -I. In an even further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and -Br. In a still further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and -Cl. In yet a further aspect, each of Rla and Rlb is independently selected from hydrogen and -F. f. R2 GROUPS
[00170] In one aspect, R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, S02NH2. SChCFb, S02CF3, and N02. In a further aspect, R2 is hydrogen.
[00171] In a further aspect, R2 is selected from -CN, S02NH2. SChCFb, S02CF3, and NO2. In a still further aspect, R2 is selected from -CN, SO2NH2, SO2CH3, and SO2CF3. In yet a further aspect, R2 is selected from -CN, SO2NH2, and SO2CH3. In an even further aspect, R2 is selected from -CN and SO2NH2. In a still further aspect, R2 is NO2. In yet a further aspect, R2 is SO2CF3. In an even further aspect, R2 is SO2CH3. In a still further aspect, R2 is SO2NH2. In yet a further aspect, R2 is -CN.
[00172] In a further aspect, R2 is selected from hydrogen and halogen. In a still further aspect, R2 is selected from hydrogen, -F, -Cl, and -Br. In yet a further aspect, R2 is selected from hydrogen, -F, and -Cl. In an even further aspect, R2 is selected from hydrogen and -I. In a still further aspect, R2 is selected from hydrogen and -Br. In yet a further aspect, R2 is selected from hydrogen and -Cl. In an even further aspect, R2 is selected from hydrogen and -F.
[00173] In a further aspect, R2 is selected from -CN and -Cl. g. R3 GROUPS
[00174] In one aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialky lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl), provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group. In a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialky lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, Cl- C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialky lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1 group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, - SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
[00175] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, - NC , -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4
monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, Cl- C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, Cl- C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
[00176] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and C1-C8 alkoxy. In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C4 hydroxy and C1-C4 alkoxy. In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from -CH2OH, - CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH2CH2OH, -CH(CH3)CH2OH, -CH2OCH3, -CH2CH2OCH3, - CH2CH2CH2OCH3, and -CH(CH3)CH20CH3. In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from -CH2OH, -CH2CH2OH, -CH2OCH3, and -CH2CH2OCH3. In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from -CH2OH and -CH2OCH3.
[00177] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, Cl- C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, - N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4
monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
[00178] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl and cyclopropyl. In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from C1-C4 hydroxy and cyclopropyl. In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from -CH2OH, - CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH2CH2OH, -CH(CH3)CH20H, and cyclopropyl. In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from -CH2OH, -CH2CH2OH, and cyclopropyl. In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from -CH2OH and cyclopropyl.
[00179] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, Cl- C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4
monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialky lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, Cl- C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
[00180] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl. In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C4 hydroxy. In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is - selected from CH2OH, -CH2CH2OH, -CH2CH2CH2OH, and -CH(CH3)CH2OH. In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is selected from -CH2OH and -CH2CH2OH. In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is propan- l-olyl.
[00181] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C8 alkoxy substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is C1-C8 alkoxy monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialk lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
[00182] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, Cl- C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, - CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, Cl- C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, Cl- C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl).
[00183] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group. In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 groups independently selected from halogen and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group. In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1 group selected from halogen and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group.
[00184] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from -F and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl. In a still further aspect,
R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from -F and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl. In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from -F and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl. In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl monosubstituted with a group selected from -F and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl.
[00185] In a further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 halogen groups. In a still further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 groups selected from -Cl and -F. In yet a further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 -Cl groups. In an even further aspect, R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 -F groups.
[00186] In a further aspect, R3 is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000060_0001
h. AR1 GROUPS
[00187] In one aspect, Ar1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and substituted with 0,
1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NFF. C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In a further aspect, Ar1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, - NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8
monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, Ar1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, Ar1 is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and unsubstituted.
[00188] In a further aspect, Ar1 is aryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups
independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In a further aspect, Ar1 is aryl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, Cl- C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, Ar1 is aryl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is aryl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted aryl.
[00189] In a further aspect, Ar1 is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, Ar1 is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, Cl- C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is phenyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialk lamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, Ar1 is phenyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted phenyl.
[00190] In a further aspect, Ar1 is heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In a still further aspect, Ar1 is heteroaryl substituted with 0,
1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is heteroaryl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, Ar1 is heteroaryl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl). In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted heteroaryl.
[00191] In a further aspect, Ar1 is selected from furanyl, 3-isopropylisoxazole, 6- isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl, 5-bromopyridin-2-yl, 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl, and substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is selected from furanyl, 3- isopropylisoxazole, 6-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl, 5-bromopyri din-2 -yl, 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl, and substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, - SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is selected from furanyl, 3-isopropylisoxazole, 6-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5-isopropylpyridin-2-yl, 5- tertbutylpyridin-2-yl, 5-bromopyridin-2-yl, 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl, 3-pyridinyl, 4- pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl, and monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, - CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is selected from furanyl, 3-isopropylisoxazole, 6-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl, 5-isopropylpyridin-2- yl, 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl, 5-bromopyridin-2-yl, 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl, and pyrimidinyl, and unsubstituted.
[00192] In a further aspect, Ar1 is furanyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is furanyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is furanyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, - N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, Cl- C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted furanyl.
[00193] In a further aspect, Ar1 is 3-isopropylisoxazole substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is 3-isopropylisoxazole substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is 3-isopropylisoxazole monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4
monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted 3-isopropylisoxazole.
[00194] In a further aspect, Ar1 is 6-isopropylpyridin-2-yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is 6-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is 6-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted 6-isopropylpyridin-2-yl.
[00195] In a further aspect, Ar1 is 5-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is 5-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is 5-isopropylpyri din-2 -yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted 5-isopropylpyridin-2-yl.
[00196] In a further aspect, Ar1 is 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted 5-tertbutylpyridin-2-yl.
[00197] In a further aspect, Ar1 is 5-bromopyridin-2-yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl- C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is 5-bromopyridin-2-yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is 5-bromopyridin-2-yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted 5-bromopyridin-2-yl.
[00198] In a further aspect, Ar1 is 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is 5-(prop-l-en-2-yl)pyridin-2-yl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted 5-(prop-l-en- 2-yl)pyridin-2-yl.
[00199] In a further aspect, Ar1 is 3-pyridinyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is 3-pyridinyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is 3-pyridinyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted 3-pyridinyl.
[00200] In a further aspect, Ar1 is pyridinyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is pyridinyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is pyridinyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted pyridinyl.
[00201] In a further aspect, Ar1 is pyrimidinyl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl- C4) dialkylamino. In a still further aspect, Ar1 is pyrimidinyl substituted with 0 or 1 group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In yet a further aspect, Ar1 is pyrimidinyl monosubstituted with a group selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, and (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino. In an even further aspect, Ar1 is unsubstituted pyrimidinyl.
2. EXAMPLE COMPOUNDS
[00202] In one aspect, a compound can be present as one or more of the following structures:
Figure imgf000066_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. [00203] In one aspect, a compound can be present as the following structure:
Figure imgf000067_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
3. PROPHETIC COMPOUND EXAMPLES
[00204] The following compound examples are prophetic, and can be prepared using the synthesis methods described herein above and other general methods as needed as would be known to one skilled in the art. It is anticipated that the prophetic compounds would be active as PanK antagonists, and such activity can be determined using the assay methods described herein.
[00205] In one aspect, a compound can be selected from:
Figure imgf000067_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof.
[00206] In one aspect, a compound can be selected from:
Figure imgf000067_0003
Figure imgf000068_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00207] In one aspect, a compound can be selected from:
Figure imgf000068_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00208] In one aspect, a compound can be selected from:
Figure imgf000069_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00209] In one aspect, a compound can be selected from:
Figure imgf000069_0002
Figure imgf000070_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
C. METHODS OF MAKING A COMPOUND
[00210] The compounds of this invention can be prepared by employing reactions as shown in the following schemes, in addition to other standard manipulations that are known in the literature, exemplified in the experimental sections or clear to one skilled in the art.
For clarity, examples having a single substituent are shown where multiple substituents are allowed under the definitions disclosed herein.
[00211] Reactions used to generate the compounds of this invention are prepared by employing reactions as shown in the following Reaction Schemes, as described and exemplified below. In certain specific examples, the disclosed compounds can be prepared by Routes I-V, as described and exemplified below. The following examples are provided so that the invention might be more fully understood, are illustrative only, and should not be construed as limiting.
1. ROUTE I
[00212] In one aspect, substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below. SCHEME lA.
PG-Z
Figure imgf000071_0001
1.1
Figure imgf000071_0002
[00213] Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein; wherein X is halogen and wherein PG is a protecting group. A more specific example is set forth below.
SCHEME IB. a) TEA, CH3CN,
160 °C, 30 min,
Figure imgf000071_0003
) - 2 2 ( : ),
rt, 1 h
1.4 1.5 1.6
[00214] In one aspect, compounds of type 1.6, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme IB above. Thus, compounds of type 1.3 are either commercially available or can be prepared by an arylation reaction of an appropriate amine, e.g., 1.1 as shown above, and an appropriate aryl halide, e.g., 1.2 as shown above.
Appropriate amines and appropriate aryl halides are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art. The arylation reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate base, e.g., triethylamine (TEA), in an appropriate solvent, e.g., acetonitrile, at an appropriate temperature, e.g., 160 °C, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 30 minutes using microwave irradiation. The arylation reaction is followed by a deprotection. The deprotection is carried out in the presence of an appropriate deprotecting agent, e.g., trifluoroacetic acid (TFA), in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 1 hour. As can be appreciated by one skilled in the art, the above reaction provides an example of a generalized approach wherein compounds similar in structure to the specific reactants above (compounds similar to compounds of type 1.4 and 1.5), can be substituted in the reaction to provide substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases similar to Formula 1.6.
2. ROUTE II
[00215] In one aspect, substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below.
SCHEME 2A.
Figure imgf000072_0001
[00216] Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein. A more specific example is set forth below.
SCHEME 2B.
Figure imgf000072_0002
[00217] In one aspect, compounds of type 2.4, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 2B above. Thus, compounds of type 2.2a and 2.2b can be prepared by reaction between an appropriate piperazine, e.g., 1.3 as shown above, and an appropriate isocyanate, e.g., 2.1a and 2.1b as shown above. Appropriate isocyanates are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art. The urea or bond formation reaction is carried out in the presence or absence of an appropriate base, e.g., triethylamine, in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane or diethyl ether, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 3 hours. As can be appreciated by one skilled in the art, the above reaction provides an example of a generalized approach wherein compounds similar in structure to the specific reactants above (compounds similar to compounds of type 1.6 and 2.3), can be substituted in the reaction to provide substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases similar to Formula 2.4.
3. ROUTE III [00218] In one aspect, substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below.
SCHEME 3A.
Figure imgf000073_0001
[00219] Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein and wherein R is absent or is selected from O, CTU CF2, and CH(OH). A more specific example is set forth below.
SCHEME 3B.
Figure imgf000073_0002
[00220] In one aspect, compounds of type 3.4, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 3B above. Thus, compounds of type 3.2a and 3.2b can be prepared by a coupling reaction of an appropriate carboxylic acid, e.g., 3.1a and 3.1b as shown above, with an appropriate amine, e.g., 1.3 as shown above. Appropriate carboxylic acids and appropriate amines are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art. The coupling reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate coupling agent, e.g., l-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-lH-l,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3- oxide hexafluorophosphate (HATU), and an appropriate base, e.g., diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA), in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane. As can be appreciated by one skilled in the art, the above reaction provides an example of a generalized approach wherein compounds similar in structure to the specific reactants above (compounds similar to compounds of type 1.6 and 3.3), can be substituted in the reaction to provide substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases similar to Formula 3.4.
4. ROUTE IV
[00221] In one aspect, substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below.
SCHEME 4A.
Figure imgf000074_0001
[00222] Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein and wherein X is halogen. A more specific example is set forth below.
SCHEME 4B.
Figure imgf000074_0002
[00223] In one aspect, compounds of type 4.4, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 4B above. Thus, compounds of type 4.2a and 4.2b can be prepared by an alkylation reaction of an appropriate amine, e.g., 1.3 as shown above, with an appropriate alkyl halide, e.g., 4.1a and 4.1b as shown above. Appropriate amines and appropriate alkyl halides are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art. The alkylation reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate base, e.g., diisopropylethylamine, in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 3 hours. As can be appreciated by one skilled in the art, the above reaction provides an example of a generalized approach wherein compounds similar in structure to the specific reactants above (compounds similar to compounds of type 1.6 and 4.3), can be substituted in the reaction to provide substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases similar to Formula 4.4.
5. ROUTE V
[00224] In one aspect, substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases can be prepared as shown below.
SCHEME 5A.
Figure imgf000075_0001
[00225] Compounds are represented in generic form, with substituents as noted in compound descriptions elsewhere herein and wherein R is absent or is Cfh. wherein X is halogen, and wherein PG is a protecting group. A more specific example is set forth below.
SCHEME 5B.
Figure imgf000075_0002
MW, 160 °C, 30 min
[00226] In one aspect, compounds of type 5.6, and similar compounds, can be prepared according to reaction Scheme 5B above. Thus, compounds of type 5.2a and 5.2b can be prepared by a coupling reaction of appropriate sulfonyl chlorides, e.g., 5.1a and 5.1b as shown above, with an appropriate amine, e.g., 1.1 as shown above. Appropriate sulfonyl chlorides and appropriate amines are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art. The coupling reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate base, e.g., triethyl amine, in an appropriate solvent, e.g., acetonitrile. The coupling reaction is followed by a deprotection. The deprotection is carried out in the presence of an appropriate deprotecting agent, e.g., trifluoroacetic acid (TFA), in an appropriate solvent, e.g., dichloromethane, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 1 hour. Compounds of type 5.4a and 5.4b can be prepared by an arylation reaction of an appropriate sulfonyl agent, e.g., 5.2a and 5.2b, and an appropriate aryl halide, e.g., 5.3 as shown above. Appropriate aryl halides are commercially available or prepared by methods known to one skilled in the art. The arylation reaction is carried out in the presence of an appropriate base, e.g., triethylamine, in an appropriate solvent, e.g., acetonitrile, at an appropriate temperature, e.g., 160 °C, for an appropriate period of time, e.g., 30 minutes. As can be appreciated by one skilled in the art, the above reaction provides an example of a generalized approach wherein compounds similar in structure to the specific reactants above (compounds similar to compounds of type 1.4, 1.5, 5.5, and 5.6), can be substituted in the reaction to provide substituted small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases similar to Formula 5.7.
[00227] It is contemplated that each disclosed method can further comprise additional steps, manipulations, and/or components. It is also contemplated that any one or more step, manipulation, and/or component can be optionally omitted from the invention. It is understood that a disclosed method can be used to provide the disclosed compounds. It is also understood that the products of the disclosed methods can be employed in the disclosed methods of using.
D. PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
[00228] In one aspect, disclosed are pharmaceutical compositions comprising a disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
[00229] In various aspects, the compounds and compositions of the invention can be administered in pharmaceutical compositions, which are formulated according to the intended method of administration. The compounds and compositions described herein can be formulated in a conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers or excipients. For example, a pharmaceutical composition can be formulated for local or systemic administration, e.g., administration by drops or injection into the ear, insufflation (such as into the ear), intravenous, topical, or oral administration.
[00230] The nature of the pharmaceutical compositions for administration is dependent on the mode of administration and can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art. In various aspects, the pharmaceutical composition is sterile or sterilizable. The therapeutic compositions featured in the invention can contain carriers or excipients, many of which are known to skilled artisans. Excipients that can be used include buffers (for example, citrate buffer, phosphate buffer, acetate buffer, and bicarbonate buffer), amino acids, urea, alcohols, ascorbic acid, phospholipids, polypeptides (for example, serum albumin), EDTA, sodium chloride, liposomes, mannitol, sorbitol, water, and glycerol. The nucleic acids, polypeptides, small molecules, and other modulatory compounds featured in the invention can be administered by any standard route of administration. For example, administration can be parenteral, intravenous, subcutaneous, or oral. A modulatory compound can be formulated in various ways, according to the corresponding route of administration. For example, liquid solutions can be made for administration by drops into the ear, for injection, or for ingestion; gels or powders can be made for ingestion or topical application. Methods for making such formulations are well known and can be found in, for example, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Ed., Gennaro, ed., Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA 1990.
[00231] In various aspects, the disclosed pharmaceutical compositions comprise the disclosed compounds (including pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) thereof) as an active ingredient, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and, optionally, other therapeutic ingredients or adjuvants. The instant compositions include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical, and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous)
administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the particular host, and nature and severity of the conditions for which the active ingredient is being administered. The pharmaceutical compositions can be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
[00232] In various aspects, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can include a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compounds of the invention. The compounds of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, can also be included in pharmaceutical compositions in combination with one or more other therapeutically active compounds.
[00233] The pharmaceutical carrier employed can be, for example, a solid, liquid, or gas. Examples of solid carriers include lactose, terra alba, sucrose, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, and stearic acid. Examples of liquid carriers are sugar syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, and water. Examples of gaseous carriers include carbon dioxide and nitrogen.
[00234] In preparing the compositions for oral dosage form, any convenient pharmaceutical media can be employed. For example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, coloring agents and the like can be used to form oral liquid preparations such as suspensions, elixirs and solutions; while carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents, and the like can be used to form oral solid preparations such as powders, capsules and tablets. Because of their ease of administration, tablets and capsules are the preferred oral dosage units whereby solid pharmaceutical carriers are employed. Optionally, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques
[00235] A tablet containing the composition of this invention can be prepared by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients or adjuvants. Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing, in a suitable machine, the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent, surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine, a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
[00236] The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention comprise a compound of the invention (or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof) as an active ingredient, a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and optionally one or more additional therapeutic agents or adjuvants. The instant compositions include compositions suitable for oral, rectal, topical, and parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous) administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the particular host, and nature and severity of the conditions for which the active ingredient is being administered. The pharmaceutical compositions can be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
[00237] Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention suitable for parenteral administration can be prepared as solutions or suspensions of the active compounds in water. A suitable surfactant can be included such as, for example, hydroxypropylcellulose.
Dispersions can also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof in oils. Further, a preservative can be included to prevent the detrimental growth of microorganisms.
[00238] Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions. Furthermore, the compositions can be in the form of sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of such sterile injectable solutions or dispersions. In all cases, the final injectable form must be sterile and must be effectively fluid for easy syringability. The pharmaceutical compositions must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage; thus, preferably should be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol and liquid polyethylene glycol), vegetable oils, and suitable mixtures thereof.
[00239] Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be in a form suitable for topical use such as, for example, an aerosol, cream, ointment, lotion, dusting powder, mouth washes, gargles, and the like. Further, the compositions can be in a form suitable for use in transdermal devices. These formulations can be prepared, utilizing a compound of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, via conventional processing methods. As an example, a cream or ointment is prepared by mixing hydrophilic material and water, together with about 5 wt% to about 10 wt% of the compound, to produce a cream or ointment having a desired consistency.
[00240] Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can be in a form suitable for rectal administration wherein the carrier is a solid. It is preferable that the mixture forms unit dose suppositories. Suitable carriers include cocoa butter and other materials commonly used in the art. The suppositories can be conveniently formed by first admixing the composition with the softened or melted carrier(s) followed by chilling and shaping in molds. [00241] In addition to the aforementioned carrier ingredients, the pharmaceutical formulations described above can include, as appropriate, one or more additional carrier ingredients such as diluents, buffers, flavoring agents, binders, surface-active agents, thickeners, lubricants, preservatives (including anti-oxidants) and the like. Furthermore, other adjuvants can be included to render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient. Compositions containing a compound of the invention, and/or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, can also be prepared in powder or liquid concentrate form.
[00242] In a further aspect, an effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In a still further aspect, an effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount.
[00243] In a further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition is administered to a mammal. In a still further aspect, the mammal is a human. In an even further aspect, the human is a patient.
[00244] In a further aspect, the pharmaceutical composition is used to treat a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity such as, for example, PKAN and diabetes.
[00245] It is understood that the disclosed compositions can be prepared from the disclosed compounds. It is also understood that the disclosed compositions can be employed in the disclosed methods of using.
E. METHODS OF TREATING A DISORDER ASSOCIATED WITH PANK ACTIVITY
[00246] In various aspects, the compounds and compositions disclosed herein are useful for treating, preventing, ameliorating, controlling or reducing the risk of a variety of disorders associated with pantothenate kinase activity, including, for example, PKAN, aging and diabetes. Thus, in one aspect, disclosed are methods of treating a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00247] In one aspect, disclosed are methods of treating a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one compound having a structure represented by a formula selected from:
Figure imgf000081_0001
wherein A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH2C(0), CF2C(0), C(0)CH2, CH2S02, S02, NHC(O), N(CH3)C(0), and CH(0H)C(0); wherein each of Q1 and Q2, when present, is independently selected from N and CH; wherein Q3 is N and Q4 is CH or wherein Q4 is N and Q3 is CH; wherein Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000081_0002
Figure imgf000082_0001
wherein each of Rla and Rlb, when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 thioalkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy; wherein R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -N02, -SO2NH2, and -SO2CH3; wherein R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl), provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group; and wherein Ar1, when present, is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl), provided that when R3 is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl or C1-C8 alkoxy then R2 is not hydrogen, and provided that when each of Rla and Rlb is hydrogen then one of Q3 and Q4 is N, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00248] In various aspects, the disclosed compounds can be used in combination with one or more other drugs in the treatment, prevention, control, amelioration, or reduction of risk of disorders associated with PanK activity for which disclosed compounds or the other drugs can have utility, where the combination of the drugs together are safer or more effective than either drug alone. Such other drug(s) can be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, contemporaneously or sequentially with a compound of the present invention. When a compound of the present invention is used contemporaneously with one or more other drugs, a pharmaceutical composition in unit dosage form containing such other drugs and a disclosed compound is preferred. However, the combination therapy can also include therapies in which a disclosed compound and one or more other drugs are administered on different overlapping schedules. It is also contemplated that when used in combination with one or more other active ingredients, the disclosed compounds and the other active ingredients can be used in lower doses than when each is used singly.
Accordingly, the pharmaceutical compositions include those that contain one or more other active ingredients, in addition to a compound of the present invention.
[00249] In a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits a decrease in PanK activity.
[00250] In a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 mM to about 25 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 15 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 10 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 5 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 1 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.5 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.1 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.05 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.01 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.001 pM to about 0.005 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.005 pM to about 25 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.01 pM to about 25 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.05 pM to about 25 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.1 pM to about 25 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 0.5 pM to about 25 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 1 pM to about 25 pM. In a still further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 5 pM to about 25 pM. In yet a further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 10 pM to about 25 pM. In an even further aspect, the compound exhibits inhibition of PanK activity with an IC50 of from about 15 mM to about 25 mM.
[00251] In a further aspect, the subject is a mammal. In a still further aspect, the mammal is human.
[00252] In a further aspect, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of the disorder prior to the administering step. In a still further aspect, the subject is at risk for developing the disorder prior to the administering step.
[00253] In a further aspect, the method further comprises identifying a subject at risk for developing the disorder prior to the administering step.
[00254] In a further aspect, the disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity is selected from PKAN and diabetes.
F. METHODS OF MODULATING PANK ACTIVITY IN AT LEAST ONE CELL
[00255] In one aspect, disclosed are methods of modulating pantothenate kinase activity in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one disclosed compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In a further aspect, modulating is inhibiting.
[00256] In one aspect, disclosed are methods of modulating pantothenate kinase activity in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound having a structure represented by a formula selected from:
Figure imgf000084_0001
wherein A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH2C(0), CF2C(0), C(0)CH2, CH2S02, S02, NHC(O), N(CH3)C(0), and CH(0H)C(0); wherein each of Q1 and Q2, when present, is independently selected from N and CH; wherein Q3 is N and Q4 is CH or wherein Q4 is N and Q3 is CH; wherein Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000085_0001
wherein each of Rla and Rlb, when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 thioalkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy; wherein R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -N02, -SO2NH2, and -SO2CH3; wherein R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxy alkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialk lamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl), provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group; and wherein Ar1, when present, is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl), provided that when R3 is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl or C1-C8 alkoxy then R2 is not hydrogen, and provided that when each of Rla and Rlb is hydrogen then one of Q3 and Q4 is N, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00257] In a further aspect, the cell is mammalian. In a still further aspect, the cell is human. In yet a further aspect, the cell has been isolated from a mammal prior to the contacting step.
[00258] In a further aspect, contacting is via administration to a mammal. In a still further aspect, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity prior to the administering step. In yet a further aspect, the disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity is selected from PKAN and diabetes. In an even further aspect, the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for modulating pantothenate kinase activity prior to the administering step.
[00259] In a further aspect, modulating is inhibiting.
G. METHODS OF USING THE COMPOSITIONS
[00260] Provided are methods of using of a disclosed composition or medicament. In one aspect, the method of use is directed to the treatment of a disorder. In a further aspect, the disclosed compounds can be used as single agents or in combination with one or more other drugs in the treatment, prevention, control, amelioration, or reduction of risk of the aforementioned diseases, disorders and conditions for which the compound or the other drugs have utility, where the combination of drugs together are safer or more effective than either drug alone. The other drug(s) can be administered by a route and in an amount commonly used therefore, contemporaneously or sequentially with a disclosed compound. When a disclosed compound is used contemporaneously with one or more other drugs, a
pharmaceutical composition in unit dosage form containing such drugs and the disclosed compound is preferred. However, the combination therapy can also be administered on overlapping schedules. It is also envisioned that the combination of one or more active ingredients and a disclosed compound can be more efficacious than either as a single agent.
[00261] The pharmaceutical compositions and methods of the present invention can further comprise other therapeutically active compounds as noted herein which are usually applied in the treatment of the above mentioned pathological conditions.
1. MANUFACTURE OF A MEDICAMENT
[00262] In one aspect, the invention relates to a method for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disorder associated with PanK dysfunction in a mammal, the method comprising combining a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
[00263] As regards these applications, the present method includes the administration to an animal, particularly a mammal, and more particularly a human, of a therapeutically effective amount of the compound effective in the inhibition of protein and especially PanK. The dose administered to an animal, particularly a human, in the context of the present invention should be sufficient to affect a therapeutic response in the animal over a reasonable time frame. One skilled in the art will recognize that dosage will depend upon a variety of factors including the condition of the animal, the body weight of the animal, as well as the severity and stage of the disorder.
[00264] Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to the manufacture of a medicament comprising combining a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method of making, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, or polymorph thereof, with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
2. USE OF COMPOUNDS AND COMPOSITIONS
[00265] Also provided are the uses of the disclosed compounds and compositions. Thus, in one aspect, the invention relates to the uses of modulators of PanK.
[00266] In a further aspect, the invention relates to the use of a disclosed compound or product of a disclosed method in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disorder associated with PanK activity and associated Coenzyme A levels such as, for example, PKAN and diabetes. [00267] In a further aspect, the use relates to a process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, for use as a medicament.
[00268] In a further aspect, the use relates to a process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a disclosed compound or a product of a disclosed method, wherein a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is intimately mixed with a therapeutically effective amount of the disclosed compound or the product of a disclosed method.
[00269] In various aspects, the use relates to the treatment of PKAN in a vertebrate animal. In a further aspect, the use relates to the treatment of PKAN in a human subject.
[00270] In a further aspect, the use is the treatment of diabetes. In a still further aspect, the diabetes is type II diabetes.
[00271] It is understood that the disclosed uses can be employed in connection with the disclosed compounds, methods, compositions, and kits. In a further aspect, the invention relates to the use of a disclosed compound or composition of a medicament for the treatment of a disorder associated with PanK activity in a mammal.
[00272] In a further aspect, the invention relates to the use of a disclosed compound or composition in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disorder associated with PanK activity selected from PKAN and diabetes.
3. KITS
[00273] In one aspect, disclosed are kits comprising a disclosed compound and one or more of: (a) at least one agent known to treat PKAN; (b) at least one agent known to treat diabetes; (c) instructions for treating PKAN; and (d) instructions for treating diabetes, metabolic syndrome, and/or side effects of aging.
[00274] In various aspects, the agents and pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be provided in a kit. The kit can also include combinations of the agents and pharmaceutical compositions described herein. [00275] In various aspects, the informational material can be descriptive, instructional, marketing or other material that relates to the methods described herein and/or to the use of the agents for the methods described herein. For example, the informational material may relate to the use of the agents herein to treat a subject who has, or who is at risk for developing, a disorder associated with PanK activity. The kits can also include paraphernalia for administering the agents of this invention to a cell (in culture or in vivo) and/or for administering a cell to a patient.
[00276] In various aspects, the informational material can include instructions for administering the pharmaceutical composition and/or cell(s) in a suitable manner to treat a human, e.g., in a suitable dose, dosage form, or mode of administration (e.g., a dose, dosage form, or mode of administration described herein). In a further aspect, the informational material can include instructions to administer the pharmaceutical composition to a suitable subject, e.g., a human having, or at risk for developing, a disorder associated with PanK activity.
[00277] In various aspects, the composition of the kit can include other ingredients, such as a solvent or buffer, a stabilizer, a preservative, a fragrance or other cosmetic ingredient. In such aspects, the kit can include instructions for admixing the agent and the other ingredients, or for using one or more compounds together with the other ingredients.
[00278] In a further aspect, the compound and the at least one agent known to treat PKAN are co-formulated. In a still further aspect, the compound and the at least one agent known to treat PKAN are co-packaged.
[00279] In a further aspect, the compound and the at least one agent known to treat diabetes are co-formulated. In a still further aspect, the compound and the at least one agent known to treat diabetes are co-packaged.
[00280] In a further aspect, the at least one agent known to treat PKAN is selected from baclofen, trihexyphenidyl, botulinum toxin, and an iron chelating agent. In a still further aspect, the iron chelating agent is deferriprone.
[00281] In a further aspect, the kit further comprises a plurality of dosage forms, the plurality comprising one or more doses; wherein each dose comprises an effective amount of the compound and the at least one agent known to treat PKAN. In a still further aspect, the effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In yet a further aspect, the effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount. In an even further aspect, each dose of the compound and at least one agent known to treat PKAN are co-packaged. In a still further aspect, each dose of the compound and the at least one agent known to treat PKAN are co formulated.
[00282] In a further aspect, the at least one agent known to treat diabetes is selected from insulin, albiglutide, exenatide, liraglutide, pramlintide, dulaglutide, acarbose, alogliptin, bromocriptine mesylate, canagliflozin, chlorpropamide, colesevelam, dapagliflozin, empagliflozin, glimepiride, glipizide, glyburide, linagliptin, metformin, miglitol, nateglinide, pioglitazone, repaglinide, rosiglitazone, saxagliptin, and sitagliptin.
[00283] In a further aspect, the kit further comprises a plurality of dosage forms, the plurality comprising one or more doses; wherein each dose comprises an effective amount of the compound and at least one agent known to treat diabetes. In a still further aspect, the effective amount is a therapeutically effective amount. In yet a further aspect, the effective amount is a prophylactically effective amount. In an even further aspect, each dose of the compound and at least one agent known to treat diabetes are co-packaged. In a still further aspect, each dose of the compound and at least one agent known to treat diabetes are co formulated.
4. SUBJECTS
[00284] In various aspects, the subject of the herein disclosed methods is a vertebrate, e.g., a mammal. Thus, the subject of the herein disclosed methods can be a human, non human primate, horse, pig, rabbit, dog, sheep, goat, cow, cat, guinea pig or rodent. The term does not denote a particular age or sex. Thus, adult and newborn subjects, as well as fetuses, whether male or female, are intended to be covered. A patient refers to a subject afflicted with a disease or disorder. The term“patient” includes human and veterinary subjects.
[00285] In some aspects of the disclosed methods, the subject has been diagnosed with a need for treatment prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed method, the subject has been diagnosed with a disorder associated with PanK activity prior to the administering step. In some aspects of the disclosed methods, the subject has been identified with a need for treatment prior to the administering step. In one aspect, a subject can be treated prophylactically with a compound or composition disclosed herein, as discussed herein elsewhere. a. DOSAGE
[00286] Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of the agents and pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures, using either cells in culture or experimental animals to determine the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Polypeptides or other compounds that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred.
[00287] Data obtained from cell culture assays and further animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity, and with little or no adverse effect on a human's ability to hear. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any agents used in the methods described herein, the
therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose can be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (that is, the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half- maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Exemplary dosage amounts of a differentiation agent are at least from about 0.01 to 3000 mg per day, e.g., at least about 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, or 3000 mg per kg per day, or more.
[00288] The formulations and routes of administration can be tailored to the disease or disorder being treated, and for the specific human being treated. For example, a subject can receive a dose of the agent once or twice or more daily for one week, one month, six months, one year, or more. The treatment can continue indefinitely, such as throughout the lifetime of the human. Treatment can be administered at regular or irregular intervals (once every other day or twice per week), and the dosage and timing of the administration can be adjusted throughout the course of the treatment. The dosage can remain constant over the course of the treatment regimen, or it can be decreased or increased over the course of the treatment. [00289] In various aspects, the dosage facilitates an intended purpose for both prophylaxis and treatment without undesirable side effects, such as toxicity, irritation or allergic response. Although individual needs may vary, the determination of optimal ranges for effective amounts of formulations is within the skill of the art. Human doses can readily be extrapolated from animal studies (Katocs et al, (1990) Chapter 27 in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Ed., Gennaro, ed., Mack Publishing Co., Easton, PA). In general, the dosage required to provide an effective amount of a formulation, which can be adjusted by one skilled in the art, will vary depending on several factors, including the age, health, physical condition, weight, type and extent of the disease or disorder of the recipient, frequency of treatment, the nature of concurrent therapy, if required, and the nature and scope of the desired effect(s) (Nies et al., (1996) Chapter 3, In: Goodman & Gilman's The
Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 9th Ed., Hardman et al, eds., McGraw-Hill, New York, NY). b. ROUTES OF ADMINISTRATION
[00290] Also provided are routes of administering the disclosed compounds and compositions. The compounds and compositions of the present invention can be
administered by direct therapy using systemic administration and/or local administration. In various aspects, the route of administration can be determined by a patient's health care provider or clinician, for example following an evaluation of the patient. In various aspects, an individual patient's therapy may be customized, e.g., the type of agent used, the routes of administration, and the frequency of administration can be personalized. Alternatively, therapy may be performed using a standard course of treatment, e.g., using pre-selected agents and pre-selected routes of administration and frequency of administration.
[00291] Systemic routes of administration can include, but are not limited to, parenteral routes of administration, e.g., intravenous injection, intramuscular injection, and intraperitoneal injection; enteral routes of administration e.g., administration by the oral route, lozenges, compressed tablets, pills, tablets, capsules, drops (e.g., ear drops), syrups, suspensions and emulsions; rectal administration, e.g. , a rectal suppository or enema; a vaginal suppository; a urethral suppository; transdermal routes of administration; and inhalation (e.g., nasal sprays).
[00292] In various aspects, the modes of administration described above may be combined in any order.
H. EXAMPLES
[00293] The following examples are put forth so as to provide those of ordinary skill in the art with a complete disclosure and description of how the compounds, compositions, articles, devices and/or methods claimed herein are made and evaluated, and are intended to be purely exemplary of the invention and are not intended to limit the scope of what the inventors regard as their invention. Efforts have been made to ensure accuracy with respect to numbers (e.g., amounts, temperature, etc.), but some errors and deviations should be accounted for. Unless indicated otherwise, parts are parts by weight, temperature is in °C or is at ambient temperature, and pressure is at or near atmospheric.
[00294] The Examples are provided herein to illustrate the invention, and should not be construed as limiting the invention in any way. Examples are provided herein to illustrate the invention and should not be construed as limiting the invention in any way.
1. CHEMISTRY EXPERIMENTALS a. 6-(4-(2-(4-(2,2-DlFLUORO-l-
METHYLCYCLOPROPYL)PHENYL)ACETYL)PIPERAZIN-1- YL)PYRIDAZINE-3-CARBONITRILE (1)
Figure imgf000093_0001
[00295] ¾ NMR (400 MHz, CDCb) d 7.46 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.25 (q, J = 8.3 Hz,
4H), 6.82 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 1H), 3.83 - 3.61 (m, 8H), 1.66 - 1.61 (m, 1H), 1.50 - 1.46 (br s, 3H), 1.41 - 1.35 (m, 1H). LRMS, m/z: 398.19 (M+H+). b. 6-(4-(2-(4-(2,2-DIFLUORO-l-METHYLCYCLOPROPYL)PHENYL)- 2,2-DIFLUOROACETYL)PIPERAZIN-1-YL)PYRIDAZINE-3- CARBONITRILE (2)
Figure imgf000094_0001
[00296] ¾ NMR (400 MHz, CDCh) d 7.55 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H), 7.49 (d, J = 9.6 Hz,
1H), 7.43 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.84 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 1H), 3.85 (d, J = 6.2 Hz, 4H), 3.72 (s, 4H), 1.70 (ddd, J = 13.6, 7.8, 3.6 Hz, 1H), 1.55 - 1.52 (m, 3H), 1.51 - 1.43 (m, 1H). 19F NMR (376 MHz, CDC13) d -132.57 (d, J = 19.0 Hz), -132.98 (d, J = 18.8 Hz), -137.60 (d, J = 14.5 Hz), -138.00 (d, J = 14.5 Hz). LRMS, m/z: 456.11 (M+Na)+. c. 6-(4-(2-(4-(2,2-
DIFLUOROCYCLOPROPYL)PHENYL)ACETYL)PIPERAZIN-1- YL)PYRIDAZINE-3-CARBONITRILE (5)
Figure imgf000094_0002
[00297] ¾ NMR (400 MHz, CDCh) d 7.47 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (d, J = 8.3 Hz,
2H), 7.19 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H), 6.81 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 1H), 3.84 - 3.79 (m, 2H), 3.77 (s, 2H), 3.76 - 3.71 (m, 2H), 3.71 - 3.67 (m, 2H), 3.65 - 3.60 (m, 2H), 2.77 - 2.66 (m, 1H), 1.82 (tdd, J = 12.5, 7.9, 5.0 Hz, 1H), 1.64 - 1.58 (m, 1H). 19F NMR (376 MHz, CDCh) d -126.14 (td, J = 13.0, 4.1 Hz), -126.55 (td, J = 13.0, 4.1 Hz), -142.52 (dd, J = 13.1, 5.3 Hz), -142.93 (dd, J = 13.1, 5.3 Hz). LRMS, m/z: 406.12 (M+Na)+. d. 6-(4-(2-(4-(l-HYDROXYPROPAN-2-
YL)PHENYL)ACETYL)PIPERAZIN-1-YL)PYRIDAZINE-3-
CARBONITRILE (8)
Figure imgf000095_0001
[00298] ¾ NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-c ) d 7.35 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.16 - 7.02 (m,
4H), 6.47 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1H), 5.56 (d, J= 6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.29 - 3.21 (m, 7H), 2.82 (p, J= 6.9 Hz, 1H), 1.16 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 6H), 0.86 - 0.46 (m, 4H). ESI-MS (M+l): 366.54. e. 1-(4-(6-CHLOROPYRIDAZIN-3-YL)PIPERAZIN-1-YL)-2-(4-(2,2- DIFLUORO-1-METHYLCYCLOPROPYL)PHENYL)ETHAN-1-ONE (9)
Figure imgf000095_0002
[00299] ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform-c ) d 7.28 - 7.07 (m, 5H), 6.81 (d, J= 9.5 Hz,
1H), 3.81 - 3.63 (m, 4H), 3.60 - 3.39 (m, 6H), 1.19 (s, 3H), 0.90 - 0.70 (m, 2H). ESI-MS (M+l): 407.49. f. 6-((2S,6R)-2,6-DIMETHYL-4-(2-PHENYLACETYL)PIPERAZIN-1- YL)PYRIDAZINE-3-CARBONITRILE (10)
Figure imgf000095_0003
[00300] ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform-c ) d 7.41 (d, J= 9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.33 - 7.08 (m,
5H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.6 Hz, 1H), 4.85 - 4.25 (m, 3H), 3.88 - 3.60 (m, 3H), 3.35 (dd, J= 13.5, 4.6 Hz, 1H), 2.92 (dd, .7 = 13.4, 4.6 Hz, 1H), 1.18 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 3H), 1.01 (d, .7= 6.9 Hz, 3H). ESI-MS (M+l) 336.52.
2. CHARACTERIZATION OF EXEMPLARY COMPOUNDS
[00301] The compounds below in Table 1 were synthesized with methods identical or analogous to those described herein. The requisite starting materials were commercially available, described in the literature, or readily synthesized by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
TABLE 1.
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000098_0002
I. EVALUATION OF ACTIVITY AGAINST PANK
[00302] Table 2 below illustrates the effects of the disclosed compounds on hPanK3, as well as various other properties of the disclosed compounds.
TABLE 2.
Figure imgf000098_0001
Figure imgf000099_0001
[00303] Table 3 below illustrates the microsome stability and plasma protein binding of the disclosed compounds.
TABLE 3.
Figure imgf000099_0002
Figure imgf000100_0001
[00304] It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made in the present invention without departing from the scope or spirit of the invention. Other embodiments of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art from consideration of the specification and practice of the invention disclosed herein. It is intended that the specification and examples be considered as exemplary only, with a true scope and spirit of the invention being indicated by the following claims.

Claims

CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1. A compound having a structure represented by a formula selected from:
Figure imgf000101_0001
wherein A is selected from OC(O), C(O), CH2C(0), CF2C(0), C(0)CH2, CH2S02, S02, NHC(O), N(CH3)C(0), and CH(0H)C(0); wherein each of Q1 and Q2, when present, is independently selected from N and CH; wherein Q3 is N and Q4 is CH or wherein Q4 is N and Q3 is CH; wherein Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000101_0002
Figure imgf000102_0001
wherein each of Rla and Rlb, when present, is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -OH, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 thioalkyl, and C1-C4 alkoxy; wherein R2 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, -CN, -N02, -SO2NH2, and -SO2CH3; wherein R3, when present, is selected from C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, and cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from halogen, - NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl, C1-C4 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C4 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C4 alkylamino, (Cl-C4)(Cl-C4) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C4 acyclic alkyl), provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group; and wherein Ar1, when present, is selected from aryl and heteroaryl and is substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -NO2, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl- C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl), provided that when R3 is C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl or C1-C8 alkoxy then R2 is not hydrogen, and
provided that when each of Rla and Rlb is hydrogen then one of Q3 and Q4 is N, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000103_0001
Figure imgf000104_0001
3. The compound of claim 1, wherein Z is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000104_0002
Figure imgf000105_0001
4. The compound of any one of claims 1-3, wherein Z is:
Figure imgf000105_0002
5. The compound of any one of claims 1-4, wherein A is selected from CH2C(0) and CF2C(0).
6. The compound of any one of claims 1-5, wherein each of Rla and Rlb, when present, is hydrogen.
7. The compound of any one of claims 1-6, wherein R2 is selected from -CN and -Cl.
8. The compound of any one of claims 1-7, wherein R3, when present, is C1-C8 hydoxy alkyl.
9. The compound of any one of claims 1-8, wherein R3, when present, is propan- l-olyl.
10. The compound of any one of claims 1-9, wherein R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1 or 2 groups independently selected from halogen and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl, provided that cyclopropyl, when present, is substituted with at least one halogen group.
11. The compound of any one of claims 1-10, wherein R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups independently selected from -F and C1-C4 acyclic alkyl.
12. The compound of any one of claims 1-11, wherein R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 halogen groups.
13. The compound of any one of claims 1-12, wherein R3, when present, is cyclopropyl substituted with 2 -F groups.
14. The compound of any one of claims 1-13, wherein Ar1 is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups independently selected from halogen, -N02, -CN, -OH, -SH, -NH2, C1-C8 acyclic alkyl, C1-C8 hydroxyalkyl, C1-C8 monohaloalkyl, C1-C8 polyhaloalkyl, C1-C8 alkoxy, C1-C8 monohaloalkoxy, C1-C8 polyhaloalkoxy, C1-C8 alkylamino, (Cl-C8)(Cl-C8) dialkylamino, and -CO(Cl-C8 acyclic alkyl).
15. The compound of any one of claims 1-7, wherein the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000106_0001
16. The compound of any one of claims 1-14, wherein the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000106_0002
17. The compound of claim 16, wherein the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000106_0003
18. The compound of any one of claims 16 and 17, wherein the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000107_0001
19. The compound of claim any one of claims 16-18, wherein the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000107_0002
20. The compound of any one of claims 16-19, wherein the compound has a structure represented by a formula:
Figure imgf000107_0003
21 The compound of any one of claims 16-20, wherein R3 is a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000107_0004
22 The compound of any one of claims 16-21, wherein the compound is selected from:
Figure imgf000108_0001
3. The compound of any one of claims 16-21, wherein the compound is
Figure imgf000108_0002
,
24. A method of modulating pantothenate kinase activity in at least one cell, the method comprising the step of contacting the at least one cell with an effective amount of at least one compound of any one of claims 1-23.
25. The method of claim 24, wherein modulating is inhibiting.
26. The method of any one of claims 24 and 25, wherein the cell is mammalian.
27. The method of any one of claims 24-27, wherein the cell is human.
28. The method of any one of claims 24-28, wherein contacting is via administration to a mammal.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for treatment of a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity prior to the administering step.
30. The method of claim 29, wherein the disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity is selected from PKAN and diabetes.
31. The method of any one of claims 28-30, wherein the mammal has been diagnosed with a need for modulating pantothenate kinase activity prior to the administering step.
32. A method of treating a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of at least one compound of any one of claims 1-23.
33. The method of claim 32, wherein the subject is a mammal.
34. The method of claim 33, wherein the mammal is a human.
35. The method of any one of claims 32-34, wherein the disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity is selected from PKAN and diabetes.
36. The method of any one of claims 32-35, wherein the subject has been diagnosed with a disorder associated with pantothenate kinase activity.
37. The method of any one of claims 32-36, further comprising the step of identifying a subject in need of treatment of the disorder prior to the administering step.
PCT/US2018/067538 2017-12-27 2018-12-26 Small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases WO2019133634A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201762610831P 2017-12-27 2017-12-27
US62/610,831 2017-12-27

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019133634A1 true WO2019133634A1 (en) 2019-07-04

Family

ID=67064135

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2018/067538 WO2019133634A1 (en) 2017-12-27 2018-12-26 Small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2019133634A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020198526A3 (en) * 2019-03-27 2021-07-08 St. Jude Children's Research Hospital Small molecule modulators of pank
US11547709B2 (en) 2017-12-27 2023-01-10 St. Jude Children's Research Hospital, Inc. Methods of treating disorders associated with castor
US11891378B2 (en) 2017-12-27 2024-02-06 St. Jude Children's Research Hospital, Inc. Small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090306100A1 (en) * 2006-11-07 2009-12-10 Joseph Barbosa Methods of treating schizophrenia
US8153633B2 (en) * 2007-06-25 2012-04-10 Amgen Inc. Phthalazine compounds, compositions and methods of use
US20130072497A1 (en) * 2005-06-30 2013-03-21 Dow Agrosciences Llc N- substituted piperazines
WO2016168619A1 (en) * 2015-04-17 2016-10-20 Indiana University Research And Technology Corporation Hepatitis b viral assembly effectors

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130072497A1 (en) * 2005-06-30 2013-03-21 Dow Agrosciences Llc N- substituted piperazines
US20090306100A1 (en) * 2006-11-07 2009-12-10 Joseph Barbosa Methods of treating schizophrenia
US8153633B2 (en) * 2007-06-25 2012-04-10 Amgen Inc. Phthalazine compounds, compositions and methods of use
WO2016168619A1 (en) * 2015-04-17 2016-10-20 Indiana University Research And Technology Corporation Hepatitis b viral assembly effectors

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11547709B2 (en) 2017-12-27 2023-01-10 St. Jude Children's Research Hospital, Inc. Methods of treating disorders associated with castor
US11891378B2 (en) 2017-12-27 2024-02-06 St. Jude Children's Research Hospital, Inc. Small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases
WO2020198526A3 (en) * 2019-03-27 2021-07-08 St. Jude Children's Research Hospital Small molecule modulators of pank

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2018395222B2 (en) Small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases
AU2017281907B2 (en) Small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases
US11905258B2 (en) 2-aminoaryl-5-aryloxazole analogs for the treatment of neurodegenerative diseases
WO2019133634A1 (en) Small molecule modulators of pantothenate kinases
US20230321092A1 (en) Methods of treating disorders associated with castor
US11752153B2 (en) Substituted quinazoline sulfonamides as thioredoxin interacting protein (TXNIP) inhibitors
US20220185796A1 (en) Small molecule modulators of pank
US11345659B2 (en) Pipecolic esters for inhibition of the proteasome
WO2022109066A1 (en) Compounds for the treatment of acute and chronic kidney disease
RU2797123C2 (en) Low-molecular modulators of pantothenakinases
RU2764652C2 (en) Low molecular pantothenate kinase modulators
US9505729B2 (en) Isoxazole analogs as mediators of transcriptional induction of E-cadherin
US11667666B2 (en) Methods and compositions for treatment of cancer
US20230219958A1 (en) Development of Potential Antidotes for Arsenicals
WO2023114453A1 (en) Phenylethylidenehydrazine dimers and methods of using same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18894015

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18894015

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1